You are on page 1of 158

July 2003 P/N 76-100016-001

PEGAsys™
Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire Alarm System

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
R

FM
APPROVED
Factory Mutual Approval J.I. No. OB2A6.AY

LISTED
UL Listing File No. S2422

July 2003 P/N 76-100016-001

PEGAsys™
Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire Alarm System

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. .

FOREWORD Note: This Manual Is To Be Used By Trained Distributors Only This manual is intended to clearly and accurately reflect the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System. Ventilating and Air Conditioning Input/Output Identification Industrial Risk Insurers Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Multi-Loop Normally Closed NCCM NIC NFPA NO NR NYC P/N PALM PAS PC PCB PCS PC Line PS RCU RDCM RDM RTC RX/TX SL SLC SPDT UL V Vac Vdc Networkable Central Control Module Network Interface Card National Fire Protection Agency Normally Open Not Registered New York City Part Number PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module Positive Alarm Sequence Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board PEGAsys Configuration Software Power/Communication Line (RX/TX Loop) Power Supply Remote Control Unit Remote Display Control Module Remote Display Module Real-Time Clock Receive Transmit Single-Loop Signaling Line Circuit Single Pole. TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AC ADA AH AI AO AST ATM BIP BPM CCM CCP DC EDP EOC ESD FCP GUI HSSD HVAC I/O ID IRI LCD LED ML NC Alternating Current Americans with Disabilities Act Ampre Hour Addressable Contact Input Device Addressable Relay Output Device Alarm Simulation Test Annunciator Terminal Module Broadcast Indexed Protocol Beats Per Minute Central Control Module Central Control Panel Direct Current Electronic Data Processing Event Output Control Electrostatic Discharge Fire Control Panel Graphical User Interface High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector Heating. installation and maintenance of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System. This publication describes the operation. P/Ns 76-100000-501 for Single-Loop System and 76-100000-600 for Multi-Loop System. Double Throw Underwriter Laboratories Volts Voltage Alternating Current Voltage Direct Current i .

III. UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories Listing File Number S2422. NYC: City of New York Listing Number MEA 454-91-E Vol. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS PEGAsys Single-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-501) • • • • • • • • UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.III. FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. PEGAsys Multi-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-600) ii . (Factory Mutual System) Approval J. Number 3005511 CSFM: California State Fire Marshal Listing Number 7165-1076:146.I. NYC: City of New York Listing Number MEA 454-91-E Vol.ACCEPTANCES. Number 3005511 CSFM: California State Fire Marshal Listing Number 7165-1076:146.I. FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.

. 1-2 Display Module ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-1 Audible Device ....................................................... 2-4 Menu Structure .....................................9 1-2............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................... 2-3 System Power-Up ................................................................................16 1-2.................................................. 1-7 Addressable AlarmLine Module ..........................................1 1-2...3 1-2.........7.......................................... 1-6 Intelligent Loop Devices ................................................... 1-8 Operation ............................ 1-4 Agent Release Output Module ......................................1 1-2................................................... vii List of Illustrations ..................................... 2-3 Default Passwords .................... 1-7 Loop Isolator Devices ......................... 1-6 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector .............................................................................. 1-8 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ............................................................................................................... 1-7 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ........................... 1-5 Network Interface Card ....................15 1-2.........................................................................................5 1-2........................3 1-2................................. 1-2 Basic Motherboard ...............................................2 1-2........................................... x Safety Summary .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3 Entering Passwords ..................................................................................1 1-1................................. 1-6 Addressable Relay Output Device ....................... 1-1 System Components ............................13 1-2...........................................17 1-2.............................................. 2-3 System Menus ............................................................ 1-3 Signal Output Module ...........................1 2-3.................................................................................................... 1-7 ORION XT Interface Module .............................................................................. 1-6 SmartOne Heat Detector ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1 Introduction ............................. 1-4 Relay Output Module ........................................................................................ 1-8 System Specification ...12................................................ i Terms and Abbreviations ......... 2-3 Levels of Security ....................................................................................................................................7.............................. 2-4 iii ................................................................................................................................................2 1-2 1-2......... 1-3 Output Modules ............................. 1-1 System Description ...................10 1-2............................................................................................................................................................19 1-2...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14 1-2.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6 Addressable Contact Input Device ................................... viii List of Tables ............2 1-2................................ 1-6 SmartOne Detector Bases .................................................. 1-2 Central Control Module (CCM) .. 2-1 LCD Display .........7..............2 2-3.......12........................................2 2-3 2-3................................................................................................... 1-5 ATM Series Driver Modules ......................................................... 1-4 City-Tie Module .............................................................3 1-2.................................................................................................. i Appendices ..................................................................................1 1-2...........3 2-4 2-5 2-5..................................................................................................... 1-2 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .......................... 2-3 System Security ............................7.................................................................................................................................... 1-1 Introduction .......................................................................................1 2-2 2-2...................... 1-6 SmartOne Ionization Detector ...................................................4 1-2................................................................................................................11 1-2....................................................6 1-2.................................................................................................. 1-2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ................................................................................................... 1-1 Component Description .....................................................................................................................................................................12............................................................................................................................ xi PARAGRAPH TITLE 1 1-1 1-1.................................................................................TABLE OF CONTENTS Foreword ......................................20 1-3 2 2-1 2-1..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7 1-2..................... 2-1 Controls and Indicators .......... 2-1 Modes of Operation ......12 1-2.............................................1 2-2...................................18 1-2......... 1-5 Standby Batteries ...................................4 1-2.............1 PAGE General Information ....................................................... 1-4 Remote Display/Control Modules .......2 1-2.........................8 1-2.....

..............5 2-8.....5 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-3............................................................................................ 2-12 Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ...7................. 2-7 Alarm Mode User Action ....................................4.................................. 3-1 Introduction ..........................3 2-8............................................................ 2-16 Functional Description ............................8 TITLE PAGE Accessing the System Menus ...................................... 3-6 Agent Release Output Module ............. 3-7 iv .............................................2................3 2-8....... 2-13 RX/TX Loops .........................................................4 2-5............. 2-4 Exiting the System Menus ............................................................................................................3 2-6.................................................5 3-3...................................................................................5 2-8..................................... 2-11 Active Trouble Mode .3 3-3...............................) PARAGRAPH 2-5............................................................................................................. 3-7 City-Tie Module .................3 2-5.............................. 2-10 Supervisory Mode Indication .....3 2-8......................................................................... 2-7 Active Alarm Mode ............. 2-13 System Output Modules .................................. 2-10 Supervisory Mode User Action ..6 2-8......................4........................................................ 2-4 List Menu Function ............................1 3-3.........................................................4 2-6 2-6....................................2................................................................................................4.................................................................................................................. 2-12 Listing RTC Programming ........... 3-2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ............................................1 2-8............................................. 2-7 Modes of Operation ........................................................................ 2-7 Alarm Mode Indications ................... 2-7 Active Supervisory Mode ...........2 2-5........................................................................................2 2-6............................7........4 2-6.................................................................................................................... 3-4 Multi-Loop Motherboard ...........................................................2 2-6...............4 2-8......... 2-11 Printing Operation ............................ 2-15 Detector Registration .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 3-3................................................................................................... 2-14 Addressing RCUs ............................................................................................1 2-8............................7..................................................................................................................................................................7.......................... 2-13 System Inputs ............................................................. 2-11 Trouble Mode Indications ....................................... 2-13 Remote Control Unit (RCU) ..................... 2-14 Listing Output Module Assignment ...........................1 2-5.....1 2-8.............................................................3 2-5....................6 3-3...........................................................3.......................7 3-3.....1 2-6........2 2-8...........................................................................................................................................................................................................4 3-3............. 2-15 Remote Control Module Registration .....................................TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont................................................. 2-12 EOC Programming .............................................1 2-8.......................................................................... 2-16 Listing all Registered RCUs ...........1.................2 2-8........................................................................1 2-8......... 3-1 Functional Descriptions ....................................................................................................................7.......................................................3.............2 2-6...........................................................................................4........................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15 Addressable Monitor Module Registration ......................................................................................................................... 2-7 Normal Standby Mode ...4 2-8...................................................................................................... 2-13 Registering Output Module Assignments ................2 2-8................................................................................................. 3-5 Signal Output Module ............ 2-12 System Programming ................................................................................................................................................1 2-6.........2 2-7 2-8 2-8.......................................................4 2-8......... 2-13 System Outputs ...................1 2-6.......... 3-3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly ............................................................2........................................................................................................................................................................5....... 2-11 Trouble Mode User Action ................... 2-13 Types of Inputs and Outputs ....3.. 3-1 Block Diagram .... 3-2 Central Control Module .......... 2-4 Menu Functions ........................................... 2-14 Registering RCUs ........................................................................................................................2........................................................................................... 2-12 RTC Programming ...3.....2 2-8..2 2-5................................................................. 2-13 Addressing Output Modules .................................................................................................1 2-8............... 3-5 Relay Output Module ...............................4........... 2-4 Isolate Menu Function ........................7 2-8... 2-7 Set Menu Function ................................................3..................................3................1 2-6......4....... 2-16 De-Registering RCUs .................................................................. 2-12 Listing EOC Programming .......................................................................................................3......................................... 2-7 Test Menu Function ...........................................................................................

...................................................................... 4-2 Walk Test ... 3-11 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ......................................................................................... 5-1 Standard Fault-Isolation Techniques ...............................................................................................................................................................................4 6 6-1 7 7-1 7-2 TITLE PAGE Remote Display Control Modules ..............1 5-2............... 4-3 Disarming Release Circuits ...................................................4..............................................................................TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont......................................................................................... 4-4 Power-Up Procedure .... 3-9 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector ..... 4-1 Lamp Test ..............................................................................21 3-3.................................................11 3-3.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 Introduction .................. 5-2 Required Tools .........1 4-3................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1 v ...... 6-1 Installation ..22 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-3.............4 4-3............................ 7-1 Materials Required For Installation ................................... 3-9 SmartOne Ionization Detector .................................. 5-3 Parts List ............4......................................................18 3-3......................................................................................13 3-3............................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 Scheduled Maintenance ..........................2 4-3................... 4-1 Loop Device Test ...................... 4-2 Walk Test Procedure ........................................................................................................... 5-1 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 3-11 Addressable AlarmLine Module ...................................................................................................... 5-1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 4-4 Arming Release Circuits .... 3-8 ATM Series Driver Modules ....................................................................................... 4-1 Maintenance Procedures ........................... 3-10 PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) ................................................. 5-1 Visual Inspection ...12 3-3........15 3-3.....................................................................................................................2 5-3 5-4 5-4.......16 3-3........................... 7-1 Introduction ..................5 4-3..........................................................................................................1 4-3............................................................................................................. 4-3 Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits ......................... 4-4 Power-Down Procedure .......................................................................................................... 3-9 Addressable Contact Input Device .......................... 4-3 AST Procedure ...................................................20 3-3..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2 RX/TX Module ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-9 SmartOne Heat Detector ...................................................................1 5-4...................................................................2 4-5 4-5..................................................5..........10 3-3............................................................................................................................ 3-12 Maintenance Procedure ..... 4-4 Powering Up the System ..................................... 5-1 Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 3-9 Addressable Relay Output Device .....................19 3-3................................ 3-8 Network Interface Card ........................ 5-1 Power Checks . 4-2 Walk Testing Detectors ......17 3-3.................................................1 4-4....... 4-4 Powering Down the System ........... 6-1 Introduction .........................................2 4-3.......................................................................... 3-10 Loop Isolator Devices ...................................................................................................................9 3-3............................................2 5-4....................................................................... 5-2 Field Devices .........................................................14 3-3.............................................................................................................................. 4-4 Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance .................................................................................................................1 5 5-1 5-2 5-2.........) PARAGRAPH 3-3................................................................................................................................ 3-8 Field Devices ................3 4-3........................................................................................................................................ 4-2 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) ................................................................. 4-1 Battery Test ............................................ 3-10 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ................................................1 4-4 4-4................................................ 5-2 Central Control Module ............................................................................................................................1 4-6 4-6..............................................3 5-4..............................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-8 External Power Failure Indicator Connection ........ 7-4 Agent Release Module ............................................................................................................................................... 7-4 City-Tie Output Module .......... 7-2 Installation of Output Modules .......................................................................................... 7-9 Addressable Contact Input Device Installation .......................... 7-6 Field Device Connection To RX/TX Module ....... 7-10 vi .......................................... 7-10 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer ... 7-10 Connecting a Printer ......................................................... 7-5 Connecting AC Power ............................................................... 7-4 Power Supply Communication Connections ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-5 Install And Connect DC Power ... 7-4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly.............................................3 7-7.......................2 7-7....................................................................................................................1 7-18.........................4 7-7.................................................................... Expansion Enclosure ................................................................................................................................................ 7-6 Batteries ............................... 7-8 Detector Installation ......................................................................................................................................................................................5 7-7................................1 7-15 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-18........................... 7-3 Relay Output Module .......1 7-9...................................................................................................................................................) PARAGRAPH 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-7........................................................................... 7-8 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure ...................................1 7-7......................................TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont..................................................................................... 7-1 Installation Procedure For Output Motherboard .......6 7-7.................................................................................. 7-6 Battery Enclosure . 7-9 Addressable Relay Output Device Installation ......... 7-3 Signal Audible Output Module ........................................... 7-1 Installation Procedure For Expansion Enclosures ..................... 7-6 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ................................... 7-9 Installation Checkout ..2 TITLE PAGE Installation Procedure For Central Control Panel ....1 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-14.. 7-8 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities .......................................................................................... 7-10 Connection of Peripherals ..........................................................................................................7 7-8 7-9 7-9.............................................................................................. 7-6 Output Signal Connection .2 7-10 7-10........................................ 7-4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly ............................................................................................................. 7-2 Installation Procedure For Rx/Tx Module (Multi-Loop Only) ..........................................

................ I-1 PEGAsys Network Interface Card ........ D-1 Factory Mutual Sprinkler Requirements for Pre-Action and Deluge Type Sprinkler Systems ................................... L-1 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................ N-1 Central Station Operation ............................................ A-1 System Expansion .............................................................................. C-1 Reserved for Future Use ....................................... O-1 vii ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. J-1 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................ F-1 Display Abbreviations . E-1 Glossary ...............................................................LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O TITLE PAGE Power Supply Requirements ......................................... G-1 Wiring Requirements for PEGAsys Signaling Line Circuit RX/TX ........................................................................... M-1 Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM) ................................................................................................................................... B-1 Releasing Applications ........................ K-1 Remote Display Control Module and Remote Display Module .................................................................................................................................................................................................. H-1 System Drawings ...........................................

...................... 3-2 Receiver/Transmitter Module................................................................... 1-5 Battery Enclosure ................................................ Details .................................................. 1-6 6-inch Detector Base ............. Multi-Loop System ....................................... 1-3 Basic Motherboard ........................... 1-7 Loop Isolator................................. 2-15 Overall Block Diagram............................................................................................... 1-4 RDCM Keypad .................................................................................... 3-8 Typical Detector .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6 4-inch Detector Base ................................................................................... 1-5 Module Mounting Dimensions .... Stand-Alone ................................................... 3-10 viii ............................................................................ 2-13 RCU Registration Screen .................LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS FIGURE 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-17 1-18 1-19 1-20 1-21 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-25 1-26 1-27 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 TITLE PAGE PEGAsys System......................................................................... 3-8 RDCM Keypad ................... Details ..................................................... 3-5 Signal Output Module............................................................................................. Details .......................................................................................... 1-7 Loop Isolator.............................................................................................................................................................. Details ............... 2-5 Active Alarms Example ....................................................................................................... 3-1 Overall Block Diagram....................... 1-8 System Front Panel ................ 1-2 Display Module Assembly ................................................................................................ Overall Diagram ...... Details ............... 1-0 Central Control Module (CCM) .............................................................................. 1-6 SmartOne Detection Device .......................................... 2-11 Output Module Address Scheme ............................................................................................... 1-2 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .................. 3-1 Central Control Module.................................................. 1-6 Addressable Relay Output Device .... 2-1 Menu Structure . 1-7 PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD ............................................................................................................ 3-7 Agent Release Output Module.... 3-7 City Tie Module..................................................................................................... 3-4 Multi-Loop Motherboard.................................................................................................................. 1-3 Signal Output Module .................. 1-7 Loop Isolator.... 1-7 Addressable AlarmLine Module ............................................................................ 3-8 ATM Module ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-4 Agent Release Output Module ......................................................................................................................... 1-3 Multi-Loop Motherboard .............................. 3-3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly Details ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ................................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Relay Output Module ..................................................... 2-11 Active Troubles and Pre-Alarms Example ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6 Addressable Contact Input Device ................................................................................. 1-4 City Tie Module ............................................................................................................................ Details .......................................................................................................................... RX/TX Mount ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-7 Air Duct Housing . 1-5 Network Interface Card .............................................................................................................. 3-9 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................ 2-7 Supervisory Example for Supervisory Mode Indication ................. 3-10 Addressable Relay Output Device ............... 3-8 Network Interface Card ........................................ Single-Loop System ......................................................................... 1-8 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module .............. Details ................................................................. 3-6 Relay Output Module................................................. 6-inch Detector Base Mount ...................................................................................................................................................................

...................... 3-11 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ................................................................................................... 3-11 Loop Isolator.................................................................................................. 7-8 Style 7....................... 7-8 CCM Printer Port .......... 7-2 Back Plate................................................................................................................................. 3-11 Loop Isolator.................................................................................................................................... 7-7 Style 4..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................) FIGURE 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 5-1 5-2 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 TITLE PAGE DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ............................................ 7-5 Battery Enclosure .................................................................................................................... Output Motherboard and Four Power Supplies . RX/TX PC Line Connections ............. 7-5 RS-485 Connection ................. 3-10 Loop Isolator. 7-7 Style 6........................................................................... 3-11 Addressable AlarmLine Module . 7-10 ix ...... 5-2 CCP Installation Drawing .............................................................................................................................................LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont............................................................................................ Two Output Motherboards ... RX/TX PC Line Connection ..................................................................................................................... 7-2 Back Plate.................................................... Eight Power Supplies .............................................................................................. 3-12 Single Loop Installation ..................................... RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators ................................ 7-7 Style 6............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-4 Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure ..................................................................................................................................... 7-2 Installation for Multi-Loop .............. RX/TX Mount ................................................................... 3-11 PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD .............................................................................................. RX/TX PC Line Connections .................... 5-2 Multi-Loop Installation ................................ 6-inch Detector Base Mount ... 7-6 Shielded Wire to CCP ......... Stand-Alone ........... 7-3 Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram ......................... 7-6 Conduit to CCP ......................................................................................................... 7-1 Back Plate.............................................................................................

.......................................... 3-7 Troubleshooting Index ..............................................................................................................LIST OF TABLES TABLE 1-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 3-1 3-2 5-1 5-2 6-1 7-1 7-2 TITLE PAGE System Specifications .................. 2-10 Multi-Loop Motherboard Connectors ........... 2-8 List Menu Function ............... 5-3 PEGAsys System Parts List ....................................................................................................... 2-2 Isolate Menu Function ........................................................................................................................ 2-9 Test Menu Functions ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8 Controls and Indicators .................................................................................................................................. 7-5 x ..................... 3-5 Approved Release Output Devices ........................................................................................................ 6-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection ............... Power Supply Module Connections to Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly ................................ 7-3 Aux......................................................................................... 2-8 Set Menu Function ............................................................................. 5-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Failure to do so can damage circuits. proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. system operations. Such a system. modules. service. verify that they will not interfere with battery and printed circuit board location. make all cable entries from the sides. or after any modification. this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. ! CAUTION System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation. Follow the instructions in the installation. ! WARNING Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control panel. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards. or punching of the enclosure. manual pull stations. heat detectors. or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. System operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. All components. Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. it is not a substitute for fire insurance! An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke detectors. When possible. circuits. up to a maximum of 50 devices. Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling. Before making modifications. or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. Do not attempt to install. to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected. Therefore. Consult with the Applications Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. xi . Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the control unit. this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA-72 (2002) Chapter 10 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. however. reaming. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. and programming manuals. This system contains static-sensitive components. audible warning devices. Like all solid state electronic devices. In addition. it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 60° to 80°F. However. This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0° to 49° C and at a relative humidity of 85% (noncondensing) @ 30°C.SAFETY SUMMARY Note: Installation Precautions– Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability. The use of overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. must also be tested and proper system operation verified. addition or deletion of system components. resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. the useful life of the system’s standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature and humidity variations. Over tightening may damage threads. and a fire alarm control unit with remote notification capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire. filing. Reacceptance testing is required after any change. Do not over tighten screw terminals. at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LIMITATIONS Note: While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates possible. operating. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference. repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.

2. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept. however. or on the other side of closed doors. The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions. The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation. 4. FIRST AID Any injury. flashlights. When working near electricity. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live equipment while holding a test meter. All electrical components associated with equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with NEC. for example. If AC power fails. all types of smoke detectors—both ionization and photoelectric types—have sensing limitations. Special precautionary measures are essential to prevent applying power to equipment at any time maintenance work is in progress. escaping gas. no matter how slight. A fire alarm system will not operate without electrical power.Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys. violent explosions. All devices and system wiring should be tested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplied with each device. NFPA and local regulatory requirements. use voltage range higher than the expected voltage. xii . children playing with matches or arson. When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. 5. Some types of measuring devices should not be grounded. The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing in the manual. these devices should not be held when taking measurements. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately. the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time. is inadequate maintenance. 3. the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. This manual is to be used by trained distributors/technicians. Furthermore. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS The following general safety precautions are to be observed at all times: 1. For this reason. overloaded electrical circuits. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. metallic pencils or any other objects having exposed conductive material. use a voltmeter to ensure that the system is not energized. TEST EQUIPMENT Make certain test equipment is in good operating condition. Auxiliary equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control panel. improper storage of flammable materials. do not use metal rulers. A second floor detector. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed. The safety precautions in this section must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. in walls. GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES Note: The following must be observed to maintain personnel safety. should never go unattended. System inspection and testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by national and/or local fire codes. Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building. or roofs. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel. Before working on electrical equipment. may not sense a first floor or basement fire.

.THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

January 2002

PEGAsys™

FIRE ALARM

FIRE ALARM

Alarm Notification Appliances

1-0

PUSH PULL

R

RS-485

PUSH / HOLD

SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT

76-100016-001

Addressable Suppression System Abort Device
Figure 1-1. PEGAsys System, Overall Diagram

PEGAsys™

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
have Version 60.0, or higher, operating firmware. Pre-networked systems are not covered in this manual. Networkable systems have a modified CCM that can accept a Network Interface Card (NIC) for peer-to-peer control unit operations, and can accommodate Remote Display Modules (RDMs), Remote Display Control Modules (RDCMs) and ATM Series Driver Modules (ATM-L/R). Networkable systems have CCM Version 7X.X firmware. Networkable systems that are directly-integrable with ORION XT HSSDs have Version 8X.X CCM firmware. 1-1.2 System Components

1-1

INTRODUCTION

This manual contains the operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, parts listing and installation information necessary to support the PEGAsys™ Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire Alarm System. Note: This manual is to be used by trained distributors only. The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation. Refer to Figure 11 for the PEGAsys System overall diagram. System Description

1-1.1

PEGAsys is a fire alarm/suppression control system which can be used for local, auxiliary, remote protective signaling and releasing device service. The system is a microprocessor based design for use with intelligent detectors and loop devices. The system utilizes distributed intelligent field devices. These devices are typically smoke detectors, contact input devices, relay outputs and signal output modules which represent a single fire alarm initiation/indicating zone. Each device contains its own data transceiver, micro controller, 4K of memory and applicable algorithms which allows each device to operate independently of the control system. These unique devices have the ability to analyze information, make decisions and store information within themselves. They communicate with the PEGAsys system using the BIP protocol which utilizes a two-wire (Style 4), four wire (Style 6) or isolated (Style 7) multiplex trunk. The PEGAsys can support up to 255 device addresses per loop, with a maximum of eight (8) loops, for a total of 2,040 intelligent device points per system. The PEGAsys is capable of controlling a wide variety of auxiliary devices, such as relays, audible/visual indicating signal devices and agent/sprinkler release systems. The system also supports the use of serial printers which provide hard copy of system status information. There are three versions of the PEGAsys currently in service. These three versions are identified as: • • • Pre-Network, Networkable, and Networkable and directly-integrable with ORION™ XT High-Sensitivity Smoke Detectors (HSSDs).

The system is comprised of three major components, as shown in Figure 1-1: the Central Control Panel (CCP) which communicates with the field devices and drives output devices such as alarm signals that communicate with central stations and various types of control equipment; a display panel located on the CCP that provides system status LEDs and Control Switches; and an 80-character LCD that provides alphanumeric display of system status information. The single-loop PEGAsys Central Control Panel (P/N 76-100000-501) consists of the Central Control Module (CCM) assembly, one receiver/transmitter (RX/TX) module and one power supply assembly. Optionally the system can add a motherboard assembly which allows for the installation of optional output modules. An auxiliary power supply module can be added which increases the base system power supply capacity to 8.0 Amps at 24 Vdc. In multi-loop form, the PEGAsys ML panel (P/N 76-100000600) consists of a CCM, one (1) power-supply assembly, one (1) RX/TX module and one (1) multi-loop motherboard mounted in the enclosure. The unique multi-loop motherboard provides the ability to connect up to eight (8) RX/TX modules to the system which allows for a full 2,040 addressable points to be connected to the PEGAsys ML system. Auxiliary enclosures are available to allow the system to be expanded. The auxiliary enclosure has the same dimensions as that of the main enclosure, with the absence of the window in the door. There are optional backplanes that install in the expansion enclosure. This allows the number of output modules and system power supplies to be expanded. To allow for maximum system flexibility and expansion, enclosure(s) and backplane(s) can be added to the system. See Appendix B for further system expansion details.

Pre-networked systems have operating firmware in the Central Control Module (CCM) that ranged from Version 48.0 to Version 6X.X. All pre-networked systems must now

76-100016-001

1-1

July 2003

PEGAsys™
1-2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY

The following paragraphs give a brief description of each component used in the PEGAsys system. For functional descriptions of each component, see Chapter 3 of this manual. 1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM)

AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM

SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE

SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET

SILENCE SCROLL

R

The CCM assembly is the heart of the system and is comprised of two (2) printed circuit board (PCB) assemblies, the display module and the main processor module. The CCM controls the operation and supervision of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX module, processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output commands to the output modules, field devices and display module(s). 1-2.2 Display Module

Figure 1-3. Display Module Assembly 1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

The display module assembly, attached to the main processor PCB, provides the system with the operator interface for control switches, system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80-character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security password and navigating through the user menus. The system buzzer provides two (2) distinctly different signaling patterns for audible warning of system alarms and troubles.

The RX/TX functions as the hardware and software interface between the field devices and the CCM. The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM, and establishes communications with the field devices. The RX/TX receives status changes from the field devices and reports these changes to the CCM. The RX/TX, shown in Figure 1-4, is capable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent devices and complies with the wiring requirements of NFPA Style 4, 6 and 7 (with the use of the loop isolator devices). Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit “T” tapping or branch circuitry. 1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly

The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) is comprised of a PCB assembly and an AC/DC switching power supply unit. The switching power supply unit provides 4 Amps of 24 Vdc from the 120/240 Vac input power. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit which provides the system with: • Battery charging and supervision AC power supervision 24 Vdc supervision Battery load test 24 Vdc ground fault detection (+/-) Auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs

SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY


SILENCE SCROLL

AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM

SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE

SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET

• • • •

R

Processor Port
PLG2

Display Reset Switch

Display Trouble LED
BUZZER
PLG3

SW1

EARTH FAULT

SUPPLY FAULT

PRINT PORT

DS1

PLG2

PLG1

0V

24 VDC

Display Port

Loop Isolator for Style 7
24 Vdc from Power Supply

JK2

JK3

PC Port

Figure 1-2. Central Control Module (CCM)

TB6

JK1

Figure 1-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
July 2003 1-2 76-100016-001

The PEGAsys single-loop panel has the ability to support a maximum of sixteen (16) output modules. It distributes 24 Vdc power and bus communications to the output modules. However. The ML motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the main system enclosure. no more than eight (8) of any one type of module can be used. It distributes 24 Vdc power. TB2 R1 W1 COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B RET J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 +24V TB1 Figure 1-6. in any combination. The bus communications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. elevator recall. The motherboard mounts to standoffs on the back of the main and expansion enclosures with screws which are provided. J9 RS-485 Figure 1-7. The PEGAsys multi-loop panel has the ability to support a maximum of twenty-three (23) output modules. Basic Motherboard 1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard The multi-loop motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100017001) is an assembly which can accept up to eight (8) RX/TX modules and provide connections for up to seven (7) output module circuit board assemblies. power shut down.5 Basic Motherboard J1 W1 TB10 JP8 JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 JP3 JP2 JP1 COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B RET J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 +24V TB9 The basic motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100007-001) is an assembly which can accept up to eight (8) output module circuit board assemblies. The following paragraphs describe each available output module in greater detail. The bus communications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. Each module occupies one slot in a motherboard assembly.PEGAsys™ combinations of RX/TX and output modules that can be used with a Multi-Loop Motherboard are as follows: No. Power Supply/Charger Assembly 1-2. A single RJ-12 connection connects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications. no more than eight (8) of any one type of module can be used. These auxiliary devices can be audible/visual signal devices. remote annunciators. The output modules plug into the motherboard assembly located on the backplate of the system enclosure. agent/sprinkler release system and any other control type output which may need to be interfaced to the system.7 Output Modules The optional output modules allow the PEGAsys system to interface with external auxiliary devices. in any combination in the system. CCMRX/TX communications for up to eight (8) RX/TX modules and bus communications to the output modules. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply via a two-conductor wiring harness. However. of RX/TX(s) 1 or 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No. The motherboard is mounted to the back of the system enclosure and/or the auxiliary enclosures. The system is limited to one City-Tie Module. The allowable 76-100016-001 1-3 July 2003 . and the system is limited to one City-Tie Module. of Output Modules 1–7 1–6 1–5 1–4 1–3 1–2 1 JP10 RS-232 TB11 RET +24V TB8 TB7 TB6 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 TB1 RS-485 JP9 Figure 1-5. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply via a two-conductor wiring harness. Multi-Loop Motherboard 1-2. HVAC systems. which uses a six-conductor. phone-type cable to connect the CCM to the motherboard. The modules and the CCM communicate over the RS-485 based bus.

7.1 SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE 1-2. Style “Y” or Class A.3 AGENT RELEASE OUTPUT MODULE The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) Alarm Sounder/Signal Output cards. Style “Z” indicating circuits (see Figure 1-8).4 CITY-TIE MODULE The City-Tie (Notification) Module will provide connection and operation for local energy or shunt type master boxes and reverse polarity styles of off-premises reporting. Style "Y" signal circuits. Each Auxiliary Relay Output card is equipped with four (4) Form C. Figure 1-8.7. 76-100002-001 Figure 1-11. Signal Output Module 1-2. 76-100003-001 Figure 1-10. Relay Output Module July 2003 1-4 76-100016-001 . dry-contact relay outputs. City Tie Module Figure 1-9. allowing up to thirtytwo (32) relays. The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) agent release output modules. Each Alarm Sounder/Signal Output card is equipped with supervised 24 Vdc outputs which can operate as Class B. providing up to eight (8) release circuits and twenty-four (24) signal outputs on those modules. thus providing thirty-two (32) possible Class B.7.PEGAsys™ 1-2. Agent Release Output Module 1-2.2 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) Auxiliary Relay Output cards. The ability to isolate an individual relay output is provided through the system operator menu.7.

or any combination of these two modules. Module Mounting Dimensions 1-2. while Model RDM is a display-only module that only permits the viewing of the current system events. RDCM Keypad 1-2. that does not exceed 31 total addresses. Alarm. and operator intervention. Models ATM-L and ATM-R. NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CAT. supervised LED outputs for graphical or tabular annunciators.000 System Status Display AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE 1 SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET 2 3 4 SILENCE Note: Maintain a minumum one-half (1/2) inch clearance around ATM-L and ATM-R Modules when installed in mounting enclosure. Pre-Alarm. along with RDCMs and RDMs. SCROLL 5 R 6 7 8 9 0 Figure 1-13. The Network Interface Card allows multiple PEGAsys Control Units to be combined into an integrated. Fire Drill. 74-200036-001 J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1 B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 N2 C26 N1 I2 I1 1 U12 CR3 D TB4 CR2 TB2 K2 TB3 CR1 K3 TB1 K1 C27 1 U13 U11 C12 U2 1 R10 C13 Y1 GND +5 TP1 TP2 I1 TP3 TP4 TP5 1 U3 C14 U4 C16 1 1 R12 U16 U17 1 U8 1 R26 R28 R27 C17 1 1 R31 C15 R38 C24 C22 R32 U10 C25 C1 RV12 RV11 R23 K4 RV10 R46 R45 RV6 RV4 RV5 RV8 RV9 RV7 RV2 RV3 E1 C20 C23 R24 RV1 E8 + R25 R6 R5 R4 R3 E7 E3 E6 E5 E4 E2 N1 N2 I2 1 R14 C2 + C3 + U7 C4 R22 R20 R41 U18 1 R2 C5 R36 1 R21 TP6 C18 R43 C10 C9 1 C8 R7 R1 U15 U9 R34 The PEGAsys supports up to 16 ATM-L or ATM-R Driver Modules. from more than one location in a facility. ATM-L/R W1 LK15 LK14 LK12 4. Two types of driver modules can be used.625 5. Supervisory. supervised relays.375 5. Event Acknowledgment.8 Remote Display/Control Modules Out B Out A In B In A S2 S1 LK16 LK17 LK32 The remote display control modules permit system events to be displayed. The input circuits for functional switches provide for the following operator intervention: System Reset. Q4 Q3 R42 Q1 1 Q2 1 U6 R18 ASHLAND.175 8.9 ATM Series Driver Modules The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphical annunciators and large numbers of auxiliary relays to be used with the PEGAsys Control Unit.10 Network Interface Card Figure 1-12. INC. Model RDCM is a duplicate of the PEGAsys Display/Control Module and allows full operator intervention and system control. R40 U20 1 U19 1 U21 R44 U14 R17 1 R19 R29 R13 U5 C11 + .000 +24 V Com PS Flt Earth Gnd A B Trouble Sup. event output control.188 1. and Lamp Test. Sil. Network Interface Card 76-100016-001 1-5 July 2003 R33 R15 The Model ATM-R Relay Driver Module can activate up to 32 programmable. and operator intervention to be accomplished. Alarm Silence. peer-topeer network for annunciation. Out Pre Alm Alarm Pwr On Lamp Test Com Ack Reset Silence Drill LK10 LK8 LK6 LK4 16 15 LK13 14 13 12 LK11 11 10 9 LK9 8 7 LK7 6 5 4 LK5 3 2 LK3 1 LK1 LK31 LK29 LK27 LK25 LK23 LK21 32 31 30 LK28 29 28 27 LK26 26 25 LK24 24 23 22 LK22 21 20 LK20 19 18 17 LK30 LK18 LK19 LK2 0. Figure 1-14. The system-level LEDs correspond to the following general conditions: Module Power.PEGAsys™ 1-2. Two styles of remote display modules are available. The Model ATM-L Annunciator Driver Module provides the PEGAsys Control Unit with up to 32 programmable. Alarm Silence. MA 01721 C7 KIDDE-FENWAL. along with 6 system-level LED outputs and 5 system-level input circuits for functional switches. and Trouble. NO.

If additional batteries are required. shown in Figure 1-18. The following paragraphs describe each available intelligent detection device. shown in Figure 1-17. The 4SB is a sub-floor style 4-inch base with an outside diameter that matches that of the low profile SmartOne detectors. SmartOne Detection Device 1-2.13 SmartOne Detector Bases Space is provided within the central control panel enclosure for up to two (2) 12 V.PEGAsys™ 1-2. INC. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM STANDBY BATTERIES KIDDE Figure 1-15.14 Figure 1-18. TEMP.2 SMARTONE PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detector provides true distributed-intelligence. is a traditionally styled detector base with an integral trim ring which provides coverage for any inconsistencies between the electrical box and ceiling material.or 90-hour standby operation. see Paragraph 7-9.11 Standby Batteries 1-2. manual release and abort stations.e. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. For installation information.12..12. sealed lead-acid batteries used for 24-. 4-inch Detector Base 2. 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001 MAX.5 inch/4-inch electrical boxes. 60. 33 AH.12 Intelligent Loop Devices Figure 1-17. ASHLAND.1. 6-inch Detector Base Addressable Contact Input Device The SmartOne Ionization smoke detector provides true distributed-intelligence. The enclosure (Figure 1-15) is a heavy duty steel cabinet that can house up to two (2) 40 AH batteries. 1-2. 1-2. NO. INSTALL.3 SMARTONE HEAT DETECTOR The SmartOne Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allows an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm devices (i.1 SMARTONE IONIZATION DETECTOR 1-2. The 6SB model. addressable microprocessor-based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. water flow and tamper switches) to the PEGAsys system. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: SmartOne TM PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The SmartOne Thermistor heat detector provides true distributed-intelligence. Figure 1-16. 76-100016-001 . N/O CAT. or 100mm electrical boxes. The SmartOne series of detection devices use universal mounting bases which are available in three styles: 1. The 6SB mounts to standard 3 inch/3. and necessary monitoring and control functions required by advanced fire alarm systems. Battery Enclosure 1-2. microprocessor-based heat detection to the PEGAsys system. The SmartOne® Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm Devices provides the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat detection. addressable microprocessorbased smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. The contact monitor is also used to interface to manual alarm. mounts to standard 3 inch/3.12. Addressable Contact Input Device July 2003 1-6 ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED MODEL AI. an optional battery enclosure is available. The 4SB.5-inch. 400 MAIN ST. Figure 1-19. addressable.

Figure 1-21. PROCEDURES MODEL AO CAT.15 Addressable Relay Output Device The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) provides the PEGAsys system with a Form C dry-contact interface for remote control applications. ASHLAND.17 Loop Isolator Devices The SmartOne series of loop isolation devices. LISTED R TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL P/N 76-100016-001 FOR MODULE INSTALL. address) to the PEGAsys Control Unit via the PALM. 70-408004-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235577-001 MAX. TEMP. Addressable Relay Output Device 1-2. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. RX/TX Mount Underwriters Laboratories LISTED Figure 1-24. offer optional loop isolation which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions (NFPA Style 7.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing R The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting particles of combustion products in air-handling systems. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: SmartOne TM Figure 1-20. Figure 1-22.e. PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD 1-7 July 2003 . INC.PEGAsys™ SHORT-1 SHORT-2 J1 DS2 DS1 R 1-2. ASHLAND. INC. Loop Isolator.. shown in Figures 1-22 through 1-24.18 ORION XT Interface Module The PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) permits direct connection of an ORION XT High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector (HSSD) to a signaling line circuit of the PEGAsys Control Unit. Stand-Alone 76-100016-001 PC PC PC PC (+) (-) (+) (-) DUCT DETECTOR MODEL DH-2000 R 1 2 3 4 N/C 5 COM 6 N/O 7 KIDDE-FENWAL. INSTALL. Figure 1-25. The ORION XT reports pre-alarm. Loop Isolator. 400 MAIN ST. The PALM is housed within the ORION XT HSSD enclosure and plugs into a receptacle on the Detector's printed circuit board.0). Air Duct Housing 1-2. NO. alarm and trouble status by individual location (i. Loop Isolator. LED LOOP ISOLATOR RX/TX Underwriters Laboratories Inc. MA 01721 Figure 1-23. 6-inch Detector Base Mount 1-2.

CHARACTERISTICS 120/220 V. Alternatively.95 Amps 24 Vdc.4 Vdc 19. Charger Output: TM The Addressable AlarmLine Module (AAM) permits an AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys Control Unit. alarm. 2 Amps 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc Figure 1-26. Outputs: (2) CCM Signal Output: Release Output: Relay Contact Rating: Trouble Relay Rating: 24 Vdc. AUXILIARY MODE P1=2&3 S1=1&2 ON KIDDE-FENWAL. IN TROUBLE CKT. ASHLAND.S. 2 Amps 24 Vdc. (4) Form C Contacts. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module 1-3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION (4) Class B. Style "Y" or (2) Class A Style "Z" 2 Amps @ 24 Vdc each System power specifications are outlined in Table 1-1. 70-200200-001 INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001 PC LINE TERMINALS .4 Vdc. and trouble signals to the Central Control Module via the RX/TX’s signaling line circuit.19 Addressable AlarmLine Module Table 1-1./AUDIO MODE SETTINGS Signal Output UL R ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM) AUX.5 Amps each Aux. INC. Line Resistance: Max. Input (Per Module) P.20 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module RX/TX Module Max. NO. System Specifications ITEM Pow er Supply *Power Requirement: P. + AUDIO MODE P1=1&2 S1=3 ON + - + - - + Release Output Type: Signal Audible Module Signal Outputs: Relay Module Contact Rating: City Tie Module Shunt Contact: Local Energy Output: Local Energy Supervisory: Local Energy Load: FM APPROVED Figure 1-27. Current Limited 11 mA Master Box Trip Current 0.S. MA 01721 U. OUTPUT CKT. Addressable AlarmLine Module 1-2. Resistive 500 mA max.PEGAsys™ 1-2. . July 2003 1-8 76-100016-001 .9 Amps 220 Vac. 1. CAT. 1.25 Amps typical *Note: Refer to Appendix A for total system power and AC branch circuit requirements. The AAM transmits pre-alarm. Line Capacitance: Max.POWER LIMITED ALL OTHERS . 3 Amps 24 Vdc. the AAM can be configured to transmit an overheat signal to the Control Unit for those applications that require excessivelyhigh temperature indications. Addressable Devices: Release Module Release Output 2 Amps @ 24 Vdc 2 Amps @ 24 Vdc each Capable of releasing solenoids (suppression and sprinkler) 26. @ 24 Vdc. 4 Amps 26.S. The ASM is designed to mount in a standard electrical box.0 Vdc 0.25 uF 26 Ohms 255 per RX/TX The Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) permits notification appliances to be controlled via commands issued from the PEGAsys Control Unit’s signaling line circuit. Output (Per Module) Bat. Voltage: Min.POWER LIMITED DEVICE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _ A B A B PC LINE TM AUX. 50/60 Hz 120 Vac. Voltage: Max. 2 Amps @ 30 Vdc or 1 Amp @ 120 Vac 5 Amps @ 24 Vdc.A.

the panel door must be open. During the "alarm off" condition. 2-2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS The control and indicators of the PEGAsys system are located on the display panel.PEGAsys™ CHAPTER 2 OPERATION 2-1 INTRODUCTION When an alarm returns to a normal state (alarm off). It also describes the operating procedures and menu system. the panel will be set to latch all alarm inputs in the system. The LCD display readouts will be used to aid users in the operation of the system. Alarm OFF is indicated by a ½-second ON ½-second OFF signal. The second mode of operation is non-latching. The display panel is mounted on top of the CCM. In the default operation. To gain access to the CCM. This allows the intermixing of latching and non-latching devices to protect critical areas where both types may be specified. System Front Panel 76-100016-001 2-1 July 2003 . and 1 second OFF continuous beeping. However. In the procedure section of this chapter there are several simulated LCD display readouts.1 Modes of Operation There are two modes of PEGAsys system operation: 1. This LCD display is used to present system status. the audible device provides no sound. The non-latching operation will allow the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off" signal to the panel. 2-1. the "RESET" button will need to be pushed. This chapter describes the PEGAsys™ system controls and indicators located on the display panel. the panel would interrupt the discharge time delay sequence of operation. The advantage of offering latching or non-latching operation per loop input device is that it allows the installer/designer to customize the system. To return the panel to normal. shown in Figure 2-1. SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET SILENCE SCROLL R Figure 2-1. and Trouble condition is indicated by a 1 second ON. The "alarm off" condition must be acknowledged to silence the buzzer. This option can be enabled using the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) to define if a loop device input is to be non-latching. Table 2-1 lists controls and indicators for the display unit. Every individual change of status must be individually acknowledged by pressing the <ACKLDGE> (acknowledge) button to silence the Audible device. When this signal is received. 2. 2-2.1 LCD Display The display panel contains an 80-character (2 x 40) alphanumeric display. The following summarizes the buzzer operation: • • • Alarm condition is indicated by a continuous ON signal. all outputs that had been activated previous to the "alarm off" signal will remain on and latched until the panel is reset. listing name and functional description. the buzzer will sound in a pulsed fashion. The latching operation will not allow the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off" signal that would possibly interrupt a discharge time delay sequence.

PEGAsys™ Table 2-1. An alarm condition will not allow supervisory or troubles to be viewed. When off. "SUPERVISORY". Turns the "ALARM" indicator off. will cause the LCD to scroll through the active event buffer(s). it silences the control unit's audible buzzer. The "ALARM". indicates a trouble condition exists in the system. AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET SILENCE SCROLL NUMERIC KEYPAD (1-0) BACKSPACE RETURN July 2003 2-2 76-100016-001 . The "SILENCE" indicator illuminates to indicate that the signal outputs have been silenced. When illuminated. When illuminated. When illuminated. When pressed during an active alarm. or supervisory condition. Subsequent conditions will cause the control unit to resound the above sequence. indicates a supervisory condition has been reported by a system-input device programmed for supervisory input. Use to enter password and system information into the menu system. or pre-alarm ON condition has occured. indicates that the system is receiving AC input power. Displays "System Reset" on the visual display. indicates the signal/audible outputs have been silenced. the system: Resets auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs used to power 4 wire detectors Resets all latched alarm conditions. The reset button must be pressed once to reset 4-wire smoke and HSSD detectors and once to reset the Control Unit When pressed after acknowledging current alarm. indicates a smoke or heat detector or an HSSD has sensed a level of smoke or heat which exceeds its pre-alarm setpoint. or "PRE-ALARM" LED indicator glows steady to indicate that the condition has been acknowledged. Use to exit the menu system and to correct wrong entries. When illuminated. indicates an alarm condition has been reported by an input device. trouble. Returns all relays to their normal state. indicates an AC input power failure has occurred (trouble condition) and the system has switched to a battery standby condition. it silences the system signal outputs which have been programmed as silenceable. Pressing the "SILENCE" switch does not affect the relay output status. supervisory. Used as the Enter key when using the menu system. When pressed after all active alarms have been acknowledged and cleared. "TROUBLE". Controls and Indicators LE D FUNCTION When illuminated. Supervisory condition will not allow the troubles buffer to be viewed. When illuminated. SWITCH FUNCTION When pressed after an alarm ON (alarm OFF if input device is set for non-latching) trouble.

Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. 8.1 Levels of Security The following step-by-step procedure is for initial powerup of the CCP. Press the return (↵) key. Ensure a pound sign (#) appears for each key pressed. The above and below RX/TX messages will repeat themselves for each RX/TX module installed in the system. Level Two (system installer) and System Manufacturer (the highest security level—reserved for the system manufacturer). It also sounds intermittently when a trouble. Default passwords are set when the system is shipped from Kidde. The above message will be displayed while the system is initializing itself. RX/TX 1 NOT REGISTERED ON RX/TX LOOP 1 6. 2-3 SYSTEM SECURITY 4. Type in three or four digit password into keypad.PEGAsys™ 2-2. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators are lit. 2. supervisory or pre-alarm condition is received until the condition is acknowledged. Verify the display reads the incorrect time and date. 1. Perform the installation checkout procedure in Chapter 7 of this manual. but may be up to eight characters in length. Alphanumeric characters can only be used with the PCS program. Verify that the display reads as follows: MAIN PROCESSOR POWER ON 5. Press zero (0) key. This feature provides two separate passwords. use the AutoLearn function from the menu function or upload the configuration from the PCS program. Press the display module reset switch. 2. Connect the backup batteries to the power supply in accordance with the procedure in Chapter 7. Passwords help to lock out any possible entry to the menus through the CCM keypad. Press zero (0) key. 7. 2-3.2 Audible Device 3. However. If alphanumeric passwords are necessary for a particular application. These default passwords are: • • Level One = 987 Level Two = 1865 These default passwords are valid until other passwords are programmed into the system. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD 76-100016-001 2-3 July 2003 . they will lock out any possible entry to the menus from the keypad if used. Verify that the audible device is silenced. Ensure that the audible device is buzzing continuously. Set time and date as follows: a. Verify that the display reads "Main Processor Power On". This device sounds continuously when a new alarm condition is received until the condition is acknowledged. Passwords consist of numeric characters (0-9) and allow access to the system from the integral keypad of the CCM. 4. After ten seconds. which increase the security of the system. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD The three security levels are: Level One (system owner). This initialization can take up to 90 seconds. 3. The user can only access the system by entering a valid password. To clear the below RX/TX message.2 Default Passwords The PEGAsys system provides protection from unauthorized entry to the system menus by utilizing two levels of default passwords: Level One and Level Two. 2-3. After approximately one minute the display will momentarily read: RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF 9. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM POWER-UP The PEGAsys system provides three distinct levels of program protection. 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2-4 2:LIST 4:TEST The Display Panel also contains an audible device which generates two separate audible tones: one for alarms and one for all other events. If using PCS software. Note: Use the default password if a new password has not been set. Verify that the system status is displayed. 10. Typical valid passwords consist of three or four characters.3 Entering Passwords The password entry procedure is listed below: 1. 2-3. verify that the correct number of RX/TX loops is enabled in the Loops Topic of the configuration file prior to uploading. as required by UL Standard 864. Press the <ACKLDGE> button. it is recommended that the Level One password be numeric and the Level Two password be alphanumeric so as to allow the user to retrieve system information (system information lists) and also prevent a user from changing any programmed system parameters. verify that the display reads as follows: RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON RXTX1 Note: For multi-loop systems only.

PEGAsys™ b. Type in 3111 on the keypad.3. Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return (↵) key. perform the following steps: 1.. Formulas are provided for each access level. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM) ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM) e. accessing the menu. described in steps d and e above. Isolating any device immediately places the system in a trouble condition and initiates an audible trouble alarm and a printout with the time. press the number two (2) key on the system keypad).1 Menu Structure The PEGAsys menu structure consists of a main menu and multiple sub-level menus. Level Two and Manufacturer security level is: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST d.1 ISOLATE MENU FUNCTION It is possible to access a previous. 2-5. shown below: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST g. Verify that the system returns to standby. such as a device address or desired alarm threshold. Press the return (↵) key. The choices of available sub menus after a valid password has been entered correspond to the security level password that has been entered. Press the backspace key as many times necessary to reach the top level menu.4 PEGAsys has a built-in menu structure. The feature is typically used to temporarily isolate auxiliary devices during a system test. higher level menu from a lower level menu by pressing the backspace key. Note: If there has been a mistake in the entered data. The following paragraphs describe the menu structure. Menu Functions 11. Type in the default Level One password (987). 2-5.3 Exiting the System Menus To exit the system's menus. In addition. exiting the menu and menu functions. The top level menu can be accessed from any sub-level menu almost anytime by pressing the backspace key located on the keypad. When the date menu appears. set the date using the same procedure as for time setting. 2-5 SYSTEM MENUS 2-5. Any one of the basic functions listed in a main menu can be selected by pressing the numeric key of the system’s keypad. The power-up procedure is complete at this point. The system is now ready for loop device registration and programming which is covered in this chapter. This menu structure has been implemented to aid users with system operating functions. The sub-level menus may also contain multiple sub-level menus. The display should read: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL HH:MM MM-DD-YR 40 CHARACTER CUSTOM MESSAGE Note: When exiting the system menus. Tables 2-2 through 2-5 list and provide a brief description of typical functions that can be performed using the PEGAsys system’s menus. 2-5. After the formula is entered. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST The main menu for the Level One. Most functions will require additional data to be entered to implement the function. date and device isolated. These formulas provide the path from the main menu to the desired function. July 2003 2-4 The isolate menu function (Table 2-2) permits the operator to isolate field devices and output modules. 2-5. Figure 2-1 shows the system menu structure. if the system is normal the display panel should show the time and date as shown in the above step. the tables provide the security access levels and a keystroke formula for each function. 2.2 Accessing the System Menus Perform the steps in Paragraph 2-3. some of the functions require the return key to be pressed to start implementing the function. which corresponds to the desired function (e. The keystroke formula is a sequence of numbers that is entered via the system keypad to access a particular function.g. 76-100016-001 . press the backspace key as many times as required to return to the incorrect data. to select the LIST function from the main menu. The main menu displays after a valid password is entered. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM) 1:AM 2:PM f. Press the backspace key. Lower level functions may also be selected from sub-level menus using the numeric keys. Note: The top level menu may not be available by using the backspace key while certain types of programming are being performed. Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for PM).4. then re-enter data from that point. c.

PEGAsys™ PLACE FOLDOUT SHEET HERE Figure 2-2. Menu Structure 76-100016-001 2-5 July 2003 .

PEGAsys™ BLANK FOR FOLDOUT SHEET July 2003 2-6 76-100016-001 .

a detector or contact input device can be tested. The Control Panel verifies that an alarm output is generated. A few examples are shown in Table 2-4. This is a redundant feature to increase system reliability and is called FailSoft Mode. the Device Address “1000-8000” will be displayed depending on which RX/TX module detects the zone alarm. but which cannot be reported by a specific device due to a malfunction in communications between the system and the alarmed device(s).3 SET MENU FUNCTION The system enters an alarm mode if a device (or devices) has detected an alarm condition. it is possible for the 80-character display to show data other than the time and date.2. 2-6.4 TEST MENU FUNCTION The test menu function. 2.4.PEGAsys™ 2-5.” 76-100016-001 2-7 July 2003 . The system display will show the time and date. trouble or supervisory conditions exist in the system. and reports “Test Result OK” for each device. The PEGAsys system has four modes of operation. ALARM MODE INDICATIONS The set menu function permits the operator to program various system parameters within the system. The test procedure in the device is activated by imposing a signal within the device that will cause an alarm output. control relays for HVAC shutdown or elevator recall).. if required. by providing the alarmed device address for indication to the operator.4.2. In this mode.2 ALARM MODE USER ACTION The following steps should be performed when the system is set into alarm: 1.g. Note: 2-6. See Figure 2-3 for example. 2-5. shown in Table 2-5. and results will be printed and displayed at the Central Control Panel. Press the display panel’s <ACKLDGE> button to acknowledge the displayed alarm condition.2 Active Alarm Mode The list menu function (Table 2-3) permits the operator to list various system parameters. In the Normal Standby Mode. All lists are real-time actual system conditions which are displayed and printed with the time and date.1 A device can signal a zone alarm to the system during some communication failures. There are two types of alarms which can occur: 1. For example: PS01_26. and The 80-character display will cycle between all currently active alarms. 2-5.4.10_A_ _ _ _ _11:06 AM_05-04-90 40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE The green AC POWER LED will be illuminated to indicate that the system’s main power source is normal. On command. no alarm. Each mode has different indications and actions required. The 80-character display will continue to cycle between any remaining alarms which have not been acknowledged. Note: In the Normal Standby Operation state. The following paragraphs describe each mode. Figure 2-3. Active Alarms Example Note: If the alarm is a zone alarm. indications and actions to be taken. no indicating LEDs will be illuminated other than the “AC POWER. Device Alarm–An alarm in which a device has communicated the alarm status properly to the Central Control Panel.0 V_0.2 LIST MENU FUNCTION 2-6. 2-6 MODES OF OPERATION The following indicates the system is in its alarm mode of operation: • The red “ALARM” LED will be illuminated and there will be a continuous audible signal by the system buzzer at the panel.1 Normal Standby Mode • This is the typical mode of the system. This occurs when the system menus are being accessed either locally or remotely through one of its serial ports. signal audible signaling devices. such as smoke/heat above the alarm threshold level. Zone Alarm–An alarm condition detected by one or several devices. allows the operator to test an individual or a group of field devices. The outputs which have been previously programmed for activation upon alarm by the specific devices will be turned on (e. This condition will be indicated by the menu selections being displayed on the display panel. 2-6. In this mode. the LCD could read: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 11:06 AM_05-04-90 40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE The system provides an option which allows the System Status Normal message to be replaced with a display of battery charging voltage and current for the system standby batteries.

List all active system alarm(s). List all active system supervisory conditions. List all active system trouble conditions List EOC program lines List RTC program lines List all loop devices registered into the system List all modules registered into the system Lists PC line voltage levels at each specified loop device Lists specified loop device 9 volt power supply level Formula 2-1-1-1 2-1-2-1 2-1-2-2 2-2-1 2-2-2 2-3-1 2-3-2 2-4-1 2-4-2 2-4-3 2-5-1 2-5-2 2-6-1 2-6-2 2-7-1 2-7-2 Access Level 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M List Isolated Loop Devices List Isolated Modules List Isolated CCM outputs List Event History Buffer (All Events) List Event History Buffer (Range of Events) List a Single Detector List Detector Level List Active Alarm(s) List Active Supervisory Conditions List Active Trouble Condition List EOC Program List RTC Program List Loop Device Addresses List Module Addresses List PC Line Voltage Levels List Loop Device 9 Vdc power supply level Note: 1 = Level One. Isolate/De-isolate A CCM signal output Isolate/De-isolate a I/O module relay output by address Isolate/De-isolate CCM relay output Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by output address Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by CCM output address Isolate/De-isolate city tie module by output address Isolate/De-isolate digital input/output by address Isolate/De-isolate all system input loop devices. 2 = Level Two. modules Isolate/De-isolate all system output modules Formula 1-1 1-2-1 1-2-2 1-2-3 1-3-1 1-3-2 1-4-1 1-4-2 1-5 1-6 1-7-1 1-7-2 Access Level 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 2/M 2/M Note: 1 = Level One. 2 = Level Two. M = Manufacturer Level Table 2-3. M = Manufacturer Level July 2003 2-8 76-100016-001 .PEGAsys™ Table 2-2. List Menu Function Function Description List all Loop Devices which are isolated List all modules which are isolated List all CCM outputs which are isolated Lists all recorded event history entries from buffer Lists a user selectable range of event history entries by date Displays a selected detector’s real time smoke/heat level Lists all system detectors pre-alarm and alarm setpoints and present level. Isolate Menu Function Function Isolate Loop Device Isolate Module Signal Output Isolate Module Release Signal Output Isolate CCM Signal Output Isolate Module Relay Output Isolate CCM Relay Output Isolate Module Release Output Isolate CCM Agent Release Output Isolate City Tie Output Isolate Digital Input/Output Global Isolate Inputs Global Isolate Outputs Description Isolate/De-isolate an RCU by address Isolate/De-isolate a signal module output circuit by address Isolate/De-isolate a release module signal output by address.

PEGAsys™ Table 2-4. 2 = Level Two. 2. Allows user to set the positive alarm sequence for devices Allows user to clear event history buffer entries Enables the Global Acknowledge Feature Disables the Global Acknowledge Feature D escrip tio n F o rmu la 3-1-1 3-1-2 3-1-3 3-2-1-1 3-2-1-2 3-2-2-1 3-2-2-2 3-3-1 3-3-2-1 3-3-2-2 3-3-2-3 3-3-3 3-3-4 3-3-5 3-4-1-1 3-4-1-2 3-4-1-3 3-4-2-1 3-4-2-2 3-4-3-1 3-4-3-2 3-4-4 3-4-5 3-4-6 3-4-7 3-8-1 3-8-2 Ac c e s s L e v e l 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M Note: 1. Enable port for internal printer connection Disable port for internal printer connection Enable port for external printer connection Disable port for external printer connection Allows user to change device address. Alarm Verification Time must not exceed 30 seconds. Allows user to adjust Ionization detector pre-alarm and alarm settings Allows user to adjust Photoelectric detector pre-alarm and alarm settings Allows user to adjust Thermal detector pre-alarm and alarm settings Allows user to register loop devices into system configuration Allows user to de-register loop devices from system configuration Allows user to disable detector LED blinking Allows user to enable detector for day function. M = Manufacturer Level 76-100016-001 2-9 July 2003 . Allows user to set Day/Night periods Allows user to activate Day mode Allows user to set 1st level password Allows user to set 2nd level password. For installation in the state of California. Allows user to activate the AutoLearn Function Allows user to set the alarm verification function and time period for an individual detector or range of detectors. Allows user to enable RTC program line to function Allows user to disable RTC program line from functioning. Set Menu Function F u n ctio n Set System Time Set System Date Set Display of Battery (V+I) Set Internal Printer Disable Internal Printer Set External Printer Disable External Printer Set Device Address Set Ionization Detector Sensitivity Set Photoelectric Detector Sensitivity Set Thermal Detector Sensitivity Register Devices De-Register Devices Blink Control Set Day/Night Mode Set Day / Night Periods Activate Day Mode Set 1st level Password Set 2nd level Password Enable RTC Program Disable RTC Program Set AutoLearn Mode Set Alarm Verification Set PAS Function Clear Event Log Global Acknowledge Enable Global Acknowledge Disable Allows user to set system time Allows user to set system date Allow user to set display of battery charging voltage and current. 1 = Level One.

7. Subsequent alarms over the initial 64 will not be displayed. and there will be a pulsing buzzer at the CCM. See Figure 2-4 for an example. Each device which goes out of alarm must be acknowledged with the <ACKLDGE> button (non-latching). 2.3. If powering a 4-wire detector from the PEGAsys. When activated. Once all alarms have been cleared in non-latching operation.1 SUPERVISORY MODE INDICATION 4. even when any or all of the first 64 alarms clear. all alarms—regardless of the total—will be processed in the EOC. in which case the “Active Troubles” or “Active Supervisories” message will be displayed. This type of trouble is usually assigned by the installer/designer to monitor critical parts of the system. 2-6. Any subsequent alarms will cause any silenced alarm circuits to reactivate. For a complete list of active alarms. 8. the alarm indicating circuits (audible devices) can be silenced by operating the “SILENCE” switch. This audible is distinctively different from the alarm signal pattern at the CCM. the address “10008000” will be displayed. 1 = Level One. press the <RESET> button once. verify that the display reads: XXX ALARMS REMAIN. The preceding will happen if no active troubles or supervisories are present. After all of the current alarms have been acknowledged. time and date. 2 = Level Two. • The yellow SUPERVISORY LED will be flashing at a one (1) second rate. the display will show the System Status Normal message. Test Menu Functions F u n ctio n Lamp Test Loop Devi ce Test Battery Test Enable Walk Test Di sable Walk Test Alarm Si mulati on Test D escrip tio n Enable user to test system LEDs functi onali ty Allows user to acti vate an electroni c test of a detector or group of detectors Allows user to acti vate a battery test to veri fy battery capaci ty Allows user to speci fy a range of devi ces to walk test Allows user to di sable walk test mode Allows i nstaller to veri fy programmed relati onshi p of i nputs to outputs by acti vati ng i nputs and veri fyi ng outputs are acti ve F o rmu la 4-1 4-2-1 4-3 4-4-1 4-4-2 4-5 Ac c e s s L e v e l 1/2/M 1/2/M 1/2/M 2/M 2/M 2/M Note: WARNING: The Alarm Simulation Test must be used with care. the display will indicate the device address and produce an alarm off (AOF) message. the <RESET> button will need to be pushed once to reset the detector and once to reset the panel to a normal condition. However. signals or shutdowns). Each additional alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm indicating circuits can be silenced. For latching mode: To return the system to normal. the display will read: NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS. For example: 1080 AOF_ _ _ _PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR 40_CHARACTER_LOCATION_MESSAGE Note: If the alarm is a zone alarm. At this time. Before using the AST. Note: Only the first 64 alarms will be displayed.PEGAsys™ Table 2-5. The “XXX” represents the total of all active alarms.3 Active Supervisory Mode The system enters supervisory mode when it detects an abnormal condition in the system that has been defined to be a higher priority than a common trouble. M = Manufacturer Level The <ACKLDGE> button must be pressed once for each alarm received at the panel. Once all current alarms have been acknowledged. ensure that any associated outputs are disconnected or isolated to prevent unexpected outputs (releases. July 2003 2-10 76-100016-001 . access the event buffer menu using the CCM keypad. The following indicates the system is in the supervisory mode of operation. The 80-character display will cycle between all currently active supervisory events. 3. When a non-latching device goes out of alarm. 2-6. the Alarm Simulation Test (AST) processes pre-programmed outputs which are related to the activated (simulated) input device. 5. • 6. indicating that active device(s) in Failsoft mode on the indicated SLC have gone out of alarm. the system may be reset by operating the <RESET> button. All active alarms can be viewed on the display by pressing the <SCROLL> button. When the system is properly reset.

This will silence the system buzzer.4 The system enters trouble mode when it detects an abnormal condition that may prevent proper operation (e.. 3. The 80-character display will cycle between all currently active troubles and pre-alarms. However. all of the active troubles or supervisories will be processed and entered into the event buffer. 76-100016-001 . For a complete listing of all active troubles and supervisories.1 TROUBLE MODE INDICATIONS The following indicates that the system is in its trouble mode of operation. Refer to Appendix G for a complete list of trouble conditions. 2-6.3. loss of communications with a smoke detector) or when a pre-alarm condition occurs. a total of thirty (30) troubles and supervisory events can be acknowledged at one time.. with XXX representing the total number of active supervisory events. Active Troubles and Pre-Alarms Example 2-6. even if any. As each supervisory condition is cleared. "System Status Normal").PEGAsys™ • The yellow TROUBLE LED will be flashing at a one (1) second rate.. 2-11 July 2003 2-6. This audible signal is distinctively different from the alarm audible signal.g. "System Status Normal"). the display will read one (1) less active supervisory event until all supervisories are clear. Subsequent troubles or supervisories will not be displayed. by default.4.4. access the event buffer by using the CCM keypad. All current trouble conditions can be viewed on the display by pressing the <SCROLL> button. all current supervisories must be acknowledged by pressing the <ACKLDGE> button. 3. However. When all trouble conditions have been acknowledged. When all active supervisory events have been cleared. For example: • Figure 2-4. To silence the supervisory audible signal. Note: The system has the option to acknowledge both supervisory and common troubles on a global basis.2 SUPERVISORY MODE USER ACTION The following steps should be performed when the system enters the supervisory mode of operation: 1.2 TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION The following steps should be performed when the system is in the trouble mode of operation: 1. Subsequent troubles or supervisories over the first 2100 will not be displayed.g. 2. and there will be a pulsing panel buzzer at the CCP. access the event buffer by using the CCM keypad. With global acknowledge. the display will read one (1) less active trouble until all troubles are cleared. only the first 2100 troubles or supervisories will be displayed. it can be done by accessing the "set" menu option using the CCM keypad. all current trouble conditions must be acknowledged by pressing the <ACKLDGE> button. and the 80-character display will show the Standby Message (e.g. When all supervisory conditions have been acknowledged. the 80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE TROUBLES REMAIN. will require that each trouble and supervisory event be acknowledged individually. 2. For the multi-loop system. the “TROUBLE” LED will be extinguished. or all 2100 troubles or supervisories clear. and the 80character display will show the standby message (e. The panel. As each trouble condition is cleared. For a complete listing of all troubles and supervisories over the initial 300. or all 300 troubles clear. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information on stepping through the menus to enable and disable the Global Acknowledge function. Supervisory Example for Supervisory Mode Indication 2-6. the SUPERVISORY LED will be extinguished. Active Trouble Mode Figure 2-5. All current supervisory conditions can be viewed on the display by pressing the <SCROLL> button. the 80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE SUPERVISORIES REMAIN. with XXX representing the total number of active troubles. However. Note: Only the first 300 troubles (supervisory or common) on a Single-Loop will be displayed. When all active troubles have been cleared. This will silence the system buzzer. if the installer wishes to enable this function. even if any. all troubles or supervisories—regardless of the total— will be processed and entered into the event buffer. To silence the trouble audible signal.

Select the RTC program by typing the formula 2-5-2. can accommodate most any fire alarm control logic applications. The RTC programming also provides the ability to control RCU relays.PEGAsys™ Note: The system has the option to acknowledge both supervisory and common troubles on a global basis. date and day of week. The program consists of sequentially numbered lines.1 LISTING RTC PROGRAMMING The PEGAsys fire alarm system incorporates two unique programming languages that are easy to understand and use. PRINTING OPERATION c. each containing control object.2. the system will print out all status change information and any system information lists that the user would request from the system using the integral keypad. refer to the PCS manual. c. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. upload. the contents of the parentheses are executed first. Press the zero (0) key. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. July 2003 2-12 76-100016-001 . 2-8. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST 2-7 In addition to the LCD display. Press the zero (0) key.1 LISTING EOC PROGRAMMING The system's Event Output Control (EOC) program can be listed using either the owner's or installer's menu functions. week and month time control basis. in equations with parentheses. The system is programmed using a personal computer connected to the system via an interface cable. Select the EOC program list by typing the formula 2-5-1. These two versatile programming languages. store and print the entire system configuration program. the system processes the EOC program and activates any associated outputs as programmed. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details. When the printer port is enabled and a serial printer is attached. The system normally processes the EOC from left to right.2 RTC Programming The RTC program permits outputs to be controlled by the system’s real-time clock. Example: The simplest event output control (EOC) equation would be: Input = Output A basic equation with one or more inputs would be: Input Operator Input = Output 2. The system will then list all lines of the Event Output Control program on the LCD and send a printout to any attached printer. see Paragraph 7-18. will require that each trouble be acknowledged individually. The PCS program allows the user to configure. 2-8. The two programs are constructed by the system engineer/installer using the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) program which is Windows® based. Alarm and pre-alarm threshold levels of all or individual detectors can be increased or decreased in sensitivity (within UL limits) under RTC control. The program consists of sequentially numbered lines of equations containing input addresses.1 EOC Programming The RTC program can be listed using either the owner's or installer's menu functions. For further details. 2-8. However. Event Output Control (EOC) and Real-Time Control (RTC). To list the system's EOC programming: 1. download. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. by default. retrieve. For detailed information pertaining to connecting an RS232 peripheral device. it can be done by accessing the "set" menu option using the CCM keypad. day.1. When an input becomes true (active). 2-8. time. the PEGAsys system information can be viewed using the printer port of the CCM. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST The Event Output Control (EOC) program logically combines the system’s input devices with the system's output devices. verify. With global acknowledge. Outputs may be programmed to occur on an hour. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. if the installer wishes to enable this function. The system will then list all lines of the RealTime Control program on the LCD and send a printout to any attached printer. output module relays and smoke detector pre-alarm and alarm set points. a total of thirty (30) troubles can be acknowledged at one time. control content. However. output addresses and logic operators. The panel. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details. To list the RTC programming: 1. edit. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information on stepping through the menus to enable and disable the Global Acknowledge function. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. 2-8 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 2. Press the return (↵) key.

2-8.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU) The RCU input and output devices. Once a line number in the RTC Program has been disabled using the procedure below. See note 2. select "ENABLE" in step 2.2. Each line number of the RTC Program is automatically enabled when entered into the system. Relay Output. heat detectors. Select the desired choice and press return. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. trouble. (Trouble Condition). are specified in the EOC program by their four-digit addresses. relay outputs.e. Continue with another RTC line or press backspace key to cancel this function. 2-8. Select the set RTC program by typing the formula 3-4-3. RX/TX loop (zone) alarms occur if a loop device alarm initiates under one of the following conditions: Figure 2-6. Relay Outputs. Press the zero (0) key.PEGAsys™ 2-8. The output module address scheme is shown below. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.3. See note 1. Each module has outputs which can be individually addressed. 2-8. Agent Release (agent and signal) outputs and the City Tie output. 2-8. city tie outputs) and loop devices (addressable relay output module or signal/ sounder module). Verify the display reads: RTC LINE NUMBER _ _ _ 4. a PC Line Short on RX/TX 1 would be displayed as "RX/TX PC Line Short Loop 1"). waterflow. City Tie output and the power supply module. release signal outputs. Type the three digit line number and press the return key. address and output circuit number. The output modules communicate with the CCM over the RS-485 communications bus.3. 2-8. The address consists of two (2) alphabetic and two (2) numeric characters which define the module type.2 ENABLE/DISABLE RTC PROGRAM LINE NUMBERS • • • Failed communications between the CCM and RX/TX module (Trouble Condition). output modules (signal outputs. manual release.. which are discussed in the following paragraphs: 2-8. 5. Failed RX/TX or CCM processor. supervisory and normal) and HSSD detectors reporting via PALM modules. agent release outputs. ZA8 = 8000. 2.).4 Addressing Output Modules The output modules include: Signal Audible.3. To enable a line number which has been previously disabled.5 SYSTEM OUTPUT MODULES The output modules which the system supports are Signal Outputs. or Failed input circuit of RCU device. Module Address (1-8). follow the procedure below. abort. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a.3.3 RX/TX LOOPS The system specifies the RX/TX loop controller using its loop number followed by three zeros (1000 for RX/TX 1) in single loop systems and (1000-8000) in multi-loop systems. Output Module Address Scheme 76-100016-001 2-13 July 2003 . manual alarm. SG – Signal/Audible Output RY – Relay Output CT – City Tie Output AR – Agent Release Output RS – Release Signal Output PS – Power Supply Monitor Module Devices which are classified as system inputs are smoke detectors. addressable contact monitors (alarm. 1. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details. Verify the display reads: 1:ENABLE 2:DISABLE 3. which are connected to the RX/TX loop(s). See note 3. The specifier (1000-8000) will appear in cases when trouble conditions are present on a particular RX/TX loop controller (i. ZA2=2000. SG 1 : 3 I/O Circuit Number (1-4).4 SYSTEM OUTPUTS Devices which are classified as system outputs are CCM signals and relays (programmable/non programmable).3. Module Type.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs The PEGAsys has various input and output devices/modules. Output modules refer to any module which installs into the optional output motherboard or multi-loop motherboard with the exception of the power supply module(s). 2-8. etc.1 SYSTEM INPUTS An alarmed input device on the RX/TX (in FailSoft mode) can only activate EOC programming if the RX/TX zone is used as a programmed input (ZA1=1000. Agent Release Output. the line will be ignored by the RTC Program until enabled.

5. There are two ways to address the RCU (Loop) devices. Perform the following steps for each RCU: 1.PEGAsys™ Note: 1. The owner's location message can only be entered and uploaded into the system by use of the PCS program . Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST 3. 3.1 for instructions on addressing PALMs. eight (8) maximum of any one output module type. Each module uses different numbered switches for module address assignment. Enter the desired address for the RCU and press <RETURN>. The system will then list all of the registered output module addresses on the LCD and send a printout to any attached printer. Verify that the display reads: PRESENT LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _ Note: All new addressable devices have an address of zero (000).1 LISTING OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENT 2. The address is set during the installation procedure by placing the switches into the correct position. For example.2. The system will now change the RCU address if it is different from the previous address. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST Output modules are registered into the system configuration through the use of the PCS program.) 2. The switches would be set for each type of module in order.5 Registering Output Module Assignments 2-8. 2. This address is stored in the nonvolatile EEPROM memory of the device. Refer to the appropriate figure in Appendix I for the correct module and the addressing matrix. 2-8. July 2003 2-14 76-100016-001 . Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. The system will display the following: TARGET LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _ 4. Press the return (↵) key. The device is identified by the CCM by these three digits. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. 1. addressable contact input monitors. and by a fourth digit which represents the RX/TX number. Each device has a three-digit numeric address. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. Refer to section one “component description” for thorough descriptions of options. refer to Chapter 3.6 Addressing RCUs RCUs refer to all devices which connect and operate from the RX/TX PC (Power/Communications) Line. The PEGAsys system can support a total of sixteen (16) output modules for single-loop and twenty-three (23) output modules for multi-loop. The output module address is set using the three (3) dip switches contained on each PCB assembly. Select the list of module address assignments by typing the formula 2-6-2. 2. To address RCUs using the “SET RCU Address” menu function. Power supply monitors only need an address. These devices include SmartOne smoke detectors. signal modules would be addressed 1-8 if there were eight (8) in the system. This optional unit provides a convenient means of addressing RCUs without using the CCM. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. they have no need for an output number. each unaddressed RCU must be connected to the RX/TX PC line one at a time. The user may address the devices individually on the system by performing the procedure listed below. Type in the Level 2 password. SmartOne heat detectors. 2-8. Press the zero (0) key. The RCUs (except PALMs) can be addressed using the Hand Held Programmer (P/N 74-200013-001). Select the set RCU address function by typing the formula 3-3-1. c. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. The only exception being the City Tie module—there can only be one City Tie module in a system at any time. 1. The installer would configure all modules in the PCS program file and then upload this file to the system which would then internally verify the existence of the specified modules. relay modules would be addressed 1-8 if there were eight (8) in the system and the same holds true for the remaining modules. refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). Press the zero (0) key. addressable output modules (AOs or ASMs) and PALM Orion XT monitor modules. The output modules vary in number of outputs. Enter the present RCU address and press the <RETURN> button. For further details on output module registration. (See Paragraph 3-3. The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered using the system keypad. For a functional description of each module. Added RX/TX Modules in the multi-loop systems are automatically registered by the CCM upon system power-up. All output modules which are programmed into the system may be listed with the use of either the owner's or installer's menu functions. c.

Any system alarm received after this time will cause all the CCM outputs (MP01-MP04) to activate.1 DETECTOR REGISTRATION Registration is where the device address is joined with the device information in the system's memory.2 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE REGISTRATION Figure 2-7. Contact monitor RCUs are also registered into the system through the PCS program. by default. During both the AutoLearn and RCU Registration procedures. Open Area (High Air Flow) and Duct. the CCM will automatically register the loop devices into memory and also set each device to default settings (e. and will issue a trouble message for each non-registered (TBL NR) device attached. The RCUs can also be registered into the system by using the PCS program. which sets all devices at default values. see Paragraph 2-8. Optionally. The system would then supervise each device specified. However. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details on RCU registration. in turn. 1-8 for multi-loop systems SmartOne smoke and heat detectors would be registered in the system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the previous section. and latching or non-latching options will have to be selected. If pre-addressed devices are used. the alarm and pre-alarm levels. The detectors will use the default values. refer to Chapter 5. Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities. The installer would specify each contact monitor RCU to be connected to the system and then upload the system configuration file to the system. See below for the specific contact monitor selections. the following choices are allowed: Alarm. they will begin to communicate with the RX/TX module. 3. The user may register the devices individually in the system. Manual Release.. WaterFlow or Normal. Device information is comprised of: device type. 1032 001-255 = Device Address (registered) 000 = Device Address (unaddressed/ unregistered) RXTX loop number 1 for single-loop systems. 2-8. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details on RCU registration. As the loop devices power up.7. The system will. Trouble. and then uploaded into system memory. attach all pre-addressed loop devices to the PC line of the RX/TX module. The user may register all pre-addressed RCUs using the AutoLearn function. detection device application. as it automatically enters the devices which it can identify into the system's configuration memory. At the conclusion of the register function. and then upload the system configuration file to the system. 2. The addressable contact monitors are registered in the system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the previous section. 2-8. The installer would specify each RCU to be connected to the system. if the output motherboard and output modules have been installed. RCU Registration Screen Example: RCU 1032 represents device 32 on RX/TX loop 1. 4. MP02.PEGAsys™ 2-8. the CCM will display the total amount of devices registered. Power-up the system (if it is not already running). The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered using the system keypad. Procedures for registering output modules are provided in the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015. Connecting an unregistered RCU address to the RX/TX will result in a "not registered" trouble (TBL NR). MP03 and MP04). Abort. The CCM will recognize the loop devices as not registered. There are three specific applications for smoke detector use: Open Area. multiple devices can be attached and registered into the system at one time using either the AutoLearn or RCU Registration function.7. There are four ways to register the RCU (loop) devices into the system: 1. The user may register all pre-addressed RCUs at once using the RCU (loop devices) registration function. The smoke and heat detector's pre-alarm and alarm set points are adjusted only when necessary if the user desires the set points to be different from the default values for each detector type. The CCM will also set the default operation of the CCM outputs (MP01. indicating that the control panel has communicated with the device and identified the device as being unregistered. To register RCU devices using the register RCU function. device messages and device settings. Manual Alarm. any system alarm input activates all system outputs.7 Registering RCUs The AutoLearn function works much the same as the registration function. 2-15 July 2003 76-100016-001 . To adjust the set points for the detectors. the PCS program will need to be used to configure the system for use with the output modules. During system configuration (using the PCS program). set the response of the device activation to alarm. The owner's location message can only be entered through the PCS program. When the register RCU function is enabled. and. sensitivity levels and input reporting) for the particular device. The system would then supervise each device specified. Supervisory. unless otherwise programmed.4 “Addressing Output Modules”). the CCM will prompt the user to enter a range of loop device addresses to register as valid system devices.g.

Verify that the display reads: DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION DEVICE FROM_ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _ 3. This will delay agent release if countdown has begun. 6: Manual Release–Active input initiates a manual release condition at the central control panel. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. c.4 LISTING ALL REGISTERED RCUs 2. This function removes the device address from the system memory but leaves the address in the device intact. 5: Manual Alarm–Active input initiates a manual alarm condition at the central control panel. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST The addressable output device (AO or ASM) is registered in the same fashion as the previous RCUs.3 REMOTE CONTROL MODULE REGISTRATION PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b.7.5 DE-REGISTERING RCUs The system provides the capability to remove a single device or group of devices from the system configuration. 2-8. Enter the desired RCU address(es) and press return. 3: Abort–Active input initiates an abort condition at the central control panel. To list all registered RCUs: 1. Verify that the display reads: July 2003 2-16 76-100016-001 . Press the return (↵) key. Select the set RCU De-Registration function by typing the formula 3-3-4. There are four (4) styles of abort available for the device. causes instant release of programmed output. Verify that the display changes to the device menu after five seconds. upload the system configuration file to the system and then the system would supervise each device specified. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b.PEGAsys™ 1: Alarm–Active input initiates an alarm at the central control panel and is latched in the EOC until the system is reset after alarm has cleared. The installer would specify each output RCU to be connected to the system. Performing this operation will cause the system to generate a trouble NR (Not Registered) for any devices which remain connected to the RX/TX PC line. Signal outputs will be inhibited from being silenced. c. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details on RCU registration. This function would be used during a system retrofit where some devices are to be removed from the system temporarily during a building renovation and then reattached after renovations are complete. Verify that the display and any attached printers list all registered RCU addresses. 2-8. Control modules can also be registered into the system by using the PCS program. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. The backspace key can be pressed to return to the main menu. This feature is very efficient because the device maintains its address information which speeds device reregistering after the renovations. Removal or disconnection of the device(s) from the PC line will clear the trouble condition(s) in the system. The owner's location message can only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into system memory. 4: Waterflow–Active input initiates a waterflow alarm condition at the central control panel and is latched in EOC program until reset. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. self-restores. Registering RCUs.7. perform the procedure which is outlined Paragraph 2-8. Select the List RCU address function by typing the formula 2-6-1. The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered using the system keypad. Press the return (↵) key. and will self-restore upon deactivation. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. 2: Trouble–Active input initiates a trouble at the central control panel. It does not latch EOC program and will self-restore upon deactivation. Press the zero (0) key. 8: Supervisory–Active input initiates a supervisory event at the central control panel.7.7. but does not latch EOC programming and will self restore upon deactivation. 2-8. The owner's location message can only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into system memory. latches in EOC program until reset. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST 2. All RCUs registered in the system can be listed using either the owner's or installer's menu function. To perform the device de-registering operation: 1. 5. The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered using the system keypad. but does not latch the EOC. To reregister RCU devices. The display will show the following to verify the device de-registration: DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION XX DEVICES DE-REGISTERED 4. latches in EOC program until reset 7: Normal–Active input initiates a momentary display but does not latch in EOC program.

2 AC Input Battery Backup RS 485 24 Vdc Output Module(s) RS 485 24 Vdc Output Module(s) Figure 3-1. Overall Block Diagram.PEGAsys™ CHAPTER 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3-1 INTRODUCTION 3-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM This chapter provides a functional description of the devices/modules used in the PEGAsys system configuration.CCM Communications Receiver/ Transmitter Module (RX/TX) SLC to RCUs (Field Devices) 24 Vdc 24 Vdc RS 485 Output Motherboard 1 RS 485 Output Motherboard 2 24 Vdc RS 485 Power Supply No. 1 RS 485 RX/TX . The PEGAsys system is divided into ten functional blocks as follows: • • Central Control Module Display Module 24 Vdc ATM Driver Module(s) 5 Vdc RS 485 RS 485 Display Module 24 Vdc 24 Vdc AC Input Battery Backup Central Control Module Channel 1 Network Interface Card RS 485 RS 485 Channel 2 RS 485 To Networked Control Unit(s) RS 485 Remote Display Module(s) 24 Vdc Power Supply No.CCM Communications Multi-Loop Motherboard RX/TX N .CCM Communications 24 Vdc SLC 1 to RCUs RX/TX Module 1 SLC N to RCUs RX/TX Module N Output Module(s) AC Input Battery Backup Power Supply No. 2 AC Input Battery Backup Figure 3-2. Single-Loop System Channel 1 24 Vdc ATM Driver Module(s) Network Interface Card 5 Vdc RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 Channel 2 RS 485 To Networked Control Unit(s) RS 485 Remote Display Module(s) RS 485 24 Vdc Display Module 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Central Control Module RX/TX 1 . 1 RS 485 RX/TX .CCM Communications 24 Vdc RS-485 24 Vdc 24 Vdc RS 485 RS 485 Output Motherboard 24 Vdc RS 485 RS 485 24 Vdc Output Module(s) Power Supply No. Overall Block Diagram. Multi-Loop System 76-100016-001 3-1 July 2003 . Each functional description covers one of the blocks shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.

real-time clock.X firmware) and multiloop (P/N 76-100008-600. 3-3. Version 7X. memory failure. networkable. networkable. The real-time clock provides the CCM with the ability to display the current time and date on the system LCD and control the system with time-based programming. microprocessor failure. The CCM provides two RS-232C serial ports for programming and monitoring of the PEGAsys system. These ports accept six-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. Ver- TB4 TB5 TB1 TB2 TB3 SKT1 Note 1: The trouble relay contacts are shown in the unpowered state. Version 8X.X firmware and P/N 76-100008-800. the system is available in two configurations: single-loop and multi-loop. Each device/module is described in detail in Paragraph 3-3.1 Central Control Module The Central Control Module (CCM) is available in two versions: single-loop (P/N 76-100008-501. Details July 2003 3-2 76-100016-001 . For Programing 24 Vdc From Power Supply Processor Port Display Reset Switch Display Trouble LED BUZZER PLG3 SW1 PLG2 SUPPLY FAULT EARTH FAULT PRINT PORT DS1 PLG1 PLG2 JK2 JK3 24 VDC TB6 JK1 Display Port 0V 24V 0V 5V 0V PC Port 24 Vdc from Power Supply Figure 3-3. 3-3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS The functional descriptions will describe each device or module depicted in Figures 3-1 and 3-2. For example. See Note 1 SOUNDER 1 A B + + SOUNDER 2 B A + + VOLT FREE RELAYS 1 2 NO NC C NO NC C V/F RELAY FAULT NO NC C REP 1 REP 2 As described in Paragraph 1-1. Note 2: Jumpers JP1-JP4 are used to configure MP01 to be signaling (default) or releasing outputs. See Note 2 CCM Reset Button JP4 JP3 JP1 SW1 JP2 JK5 I/O PORT BT1 RX/TX PORT To Output Modules and Power Supplies To RX/TX Loop Controller JK1 JK2 JK3 1 PLG2 TB6 24V 5V 0V EARTH FLT SUPPLY FLT JK4 DISP PORT PRINT PORT P. watch dog timer and RS-232 serial communication input/output ports. RS-232 port troubles. networkable. Figures 3-1 and 3-2. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX modules. processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output commands to the output modules. The CCM controls the operation and supervision of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys system. The PCS program is used to interface to the system for programming purposes. Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the system. Version 8X.PEGAsys™ • • • • • • • • RX/TX Module Output Modules RCUs (Field Devices) Power Supply Module Motherboard Remote Display/Control Modules (Optional) ATM Driver Modules (Optional) Network Interface Card (Optional) sion 7X. See Appendix I for further details. The above devices/modules for both configurations are shown in the Overall Functional Block Diagrams.2. A multi-level password scheme protects the system from unauthorized access.X firmware and P/N 76-100008-701. field devices and display module(s). Figure 3-3 contains the main central processing unit. networkable. ORION XT compatible. etcetera.X firmware). ORION XT compatible. Central Control Module. PORT PLG1 DISPLAY To External Printer To Remote P.C.C.

PEGAsys™
Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 and MP2) can be used for signaling devices (horns, strobes, bells) and allow up to 2.0 Amps of 24 Vdc power. One of the two outputs is programmed for releasing solenoid type suppression equipment (Agent and Sprinkler type systems). Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 and MP4) are on the CCM for controlling building functions during alarm occurrences. These relay outputs are activated through the EOC programming which allows system inputs to be related to system outputs. Each of these relays have Form C contacts, rated at 1 A, 30 Vdc. One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied, which is normally powered and will transfer on any system trouble, pre-alarm or complete power-off condition. Form C contact rating is 1 A @ 30 Vdc. See Appendix I for further installation details. An event history buffer is provided in the CCM which will store 1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multiloop of system event information and allow the operator to retrieve this information for review of system operation. The PCS program provides the ability to download, store and print all or a portion of the Event History Buffer. 3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

The RX/TX functions as the hardware and software interface between the loop devices and the CCM. Each installed RX/TX module continually monitors all addressable devices for alarm and trouble conditions. Each device is capable of initiating and sending alarm and trouble messages to the RX/TX module to which it is connected. The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM and establishes communications with the loop devices. The RX/TX receives status changes from the loop devices and
STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit, with Loop Isolator

24 Vdc (Red)

24 Vdc from Power Supply

Loop Isolator
RS-232 Port for Communication with CCM
Zone 1

Zone 2

Loop Isolator

Zone 3

See Note

Loop Isolator

Loop Isolator

CPU Reset
PC Line Normal

LOOP ISOLATOR Mounted to RX/TX 74-200012-001

CPU Reset
PC Line Reset

Loop Isolator for Style 7 (74-200012-001)

RX/TX
Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices between loop isolators

STYLE 7 Signal Line Circuit

See Note

Loop Isolator Loop Isolator
Zone 2

Note: Refer to jumper table in Appendix I
STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit

1 2 3 4
STYLE 4 Signal Line Circuit

Zone 1

See Note

Loop Isolator

4

LOOP ISOLATOR Mounted to RX/TX 74-200012-001

RX/TX
Note: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20 ft. of a device with wiring in conduit to be in accordance with NFPA Style 7 requirements.

Figure 3-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details
76-100016-001 3-3 July 2003

1 2 3 4

1 2 3

1 2 3 4
24V RET 24V RET

RX/TX 76-100005-001

Loop Isolator Loop Isolator

Zone 3

Loop Isolator

24V RET 24V RET

PEGAsys™
reports these changes to the CCM. The RX/TX (see Figure 3-4) is capable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent devices and complies with the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) requirements of NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 and 7. Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit “T” tapping or branch circuitry. Style 7 requires the use of isolator devices. 3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly • Trouble relay that transfers upon any power supply trouble or power off condition (relay shown in the non-powered state) Two auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs (programmable for switched or non-switched configurations)

The power supply/charger assembly (see Figure 3-5) (P/N 76-100009-010), is comprised of a PCB mounted on an AC/DC switching power module. The switching power supply provides 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power from the 120/ 240 Vac input power. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor-based unit which provides the system with: • • • • • Battery charging (up to 99 AH) and supervision (low voltage battery cutoff is at 19 Vdc) AC power supervision 24 Vdc supervision Battery load test 24 Vdc ground fault detection (+/-)

The auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs are rated at 1.5 Amp each and can be used to power four-wire type detection devices such as smoke, flame and gas detectors. Note: Outputs must be sized properly to stay within output current limits.

The power supply/charger assembly is addressable and communicates with the CCM over the RS-485 communications bus. The power supply/charger assembly provides terminal connections for an auxiliary power module. This module comes with two different wiring harnesses, as follows: • P/N 76-100009-002. Supplied with a 36-inch harness that is meant to connect a main power supply/charger assembly to the auxiliary power module in the main cabinet.

NOTE: SOLDER A 0 OHM, 1/4 W RESISTOR ACROSS W5 WHEN USING 220 VAC POWER.

CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUST BE GREATER THAN 22 VDC BEFORE CONNECTION TO THE PANEL.

TWO (2) SEALED LEAD-ACID BATTERIES

POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC

POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC

Figure 3-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly Details
July 2003 3-4 76-100016-001

PEGAsys™
• P/N 76-100009-003. Supplied with an 8-inch harness to mount a main power supply/charger assembly to an auxiliary power module in a expansion enclosure. The RX/TX modules communicate to the CCM via the multiplexer, located on the motherboard. The CCM identifies each of the installed RX/TX modules by the RS-232 connection on the motherboard. Table 3-1 lists each RX/TX communication connection located on the motherboard and the loop number and addresses assigned to the connected module. See Appendix I for installation details. Table 3-1. Multi-Loop Motherboard Connectors
C ON N E C T OR JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8 L OOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AD D R E S S 1001-1255 2001-2255 3001-3255 4001-4255 5001-5255 6001-6255 7001-7255 8001-8255

The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main power supply/charger assembly will provide an additional 4 Amps of current and make the total available current 8 Amps for this assembly. The system can support up to eight (8) main power supply/charger assemblies with the capability of adding an auxiliary power module to each one to provide a maximum available current of 64 Amps. Each additional power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009010) will need to have a separate address to operate in the system. The auxiliary power module shares the same address as the main power supply/charger assembly that it is connected to. See Appendix I for further installation details. 3-3.4 Multi-Loop Motherboard

The multi-loop motherboard assembly, P/N 76-100017-001, is an assembly which can accept any combination of nine (9) modules consisting of up to eight (8) RX/TX modules and provide connections for up to seven (7) output module circuit board assemblies (see Figure 3-6). The ML motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the main system enclosure. It distributes the system 24 Vdc power, CCM-RX/TX communications and output bus communications to the output modules. The output bus communications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. A single RJ-12 connection connects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply via a two-conductor wiring harness connected to a terminal block (TB11) and is distributed through terminal blocks (TB1-TB8) for connection to RX/TXs. The 24 Vdc, provided by the system power supply via two-conductor wiring connected to terminal block TB-9, is distributed through receptacles for powering output modules.

3-3.5

Signal Output Module

The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) Signal Output modules, shown in Figure 3-7, thus providing thirty-two (32) possible signal circuits. Each Signal Output module is equipped with supervised 24 Vdc outputs, which can operate as Class B, Style “Y” or Class A, Style “Z” indicating circuits. The module will allow for four (4) Class B or two (2) Class A or a mix of two (2) Class B and one (1) Class A. Each circuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault. Individual outputs can be isolated via the system operator menu.

JP10
RS-232

TB11
RET +24V

TB8

TB7

TB6

TB5

TB4

TB3

TB2

TB1
RS-485

JP9

W1

TB10

JP8

JP7

JP6

JP5

JP4

JP3

JP2

JP1

COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B

RET

J1

J2

J3

J4

J5

J6

J7

+24V

TB9

Note: If the motherboard is the last device on the RS-485 bus, the W1 jumper remains in place. If the motherboard is not the last device on the RS-485 bus, then it must be removed.

Figure 3-6. Multi-Loop Motherboard, Details
76-100016-001 3-5 July 2003

See Appendix I for installation details. Relation between each signal output and its input source is defined by the panel EOC logic program. STYLE "Y" AND 1 CLASS A STYLE "Z” 5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 11 + 12 + CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 2 10K EOR CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4 10K EOR CIRCUIT 3 Figure 3-7. See Appendix I for further installation details. dry contact relay outputs. Each circuit can be individually programmed via the PCS program for Continuous. In Walk Test mode. Output circuits are listed for use in power limited applications. Signal Output Module.PEGAsys™ 2 CLASS A. The ability to isolate an individual relay output is accomplished through the system operator menu. the signal output circuit(s) sounds the test signal (if programmed properly). STYLE "Y" 5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 11 + 12 + 2 CLASS B. Relation between each relay output and its input source is defined by the panel EOC 3-6 76-100016-001 July 2003 .0 second pulse. Power for normal standby and alarm operation derives from either of two sources: • • Primary supply up to its capacity.0 Amp @ 30 Vdc and 1. Refer to Section 1-2.0 Amp @ 120 Vac.0 Amp maximum per circuit. 10K EOR 3: Only 8 of this Type Module can be used on the system. sounded once as each device is activated. in Chapter 1. 10K EOR 10K EOR 4 CLASS B. STYLE "Z” 5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 11 + 12 + CIRCUIT 1 10K EOR Reset Switch Trouble LED SIGNAL AUD 76-100003-001 { { Module Address Assignment CIRCUIT 3 10K EOR See Note 2 1 CLASS A. Pulsed 60 or 120 BPM (March- The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) Auxiliary Relay Output cards for up to thirty-two (32) relays . or Auxiliary power supply input Time) or Coded (Temporal Pattern) operation. STYLE "Y" 5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 11 + 12 + Auxiliary Power NotUsed Sounder Circuits 1-4 TB1 CIRCUIT 1 10K EOR CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 4 10K EOR 10K EOR Note 1: See Appendix I for Jumper Configuration (W1-W8). for other limitations. 3-3. Details The alarm output circuits are polarity reversing type. The walk test signal is a 1. STYLE "Z" AND 2 CLASS B. 2: Cut Jumpers W9 & W10 when Auxiliary Power Input is used to remove module from motherboard power bus.7.6 Relay Output Module Provision for hardwire input of auxiliary power has been made through the use of hardwire connections between the auxiliary power supply and terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block of the signal module. The auxiliary relays are rated for 2. Each Auxiliary Relay Output card (shown in Figure 3-8) is equipped with four (4) Form C. Each relay output can be individually programmed via the PCS program for operation. Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush currents has been made to help avoid any potential problems with the increased power requirements in support of the wide range of the ADA/UL 1971 signaling appliances in the marketplace. rated for 24 Vdc signaling devices up to 2.

supervised output which is programmable for solenoid-type discharge controls. or Auxiliary power supply input. Each card is equipped with supervised signaling outputs for three (3) Class B. All signaling power is fully regulated. The ability for individual output isolation is provided through the system menus. for other limitations. Relay Output Module. Refer to paragraph 1-2. Table 3-2 details all devices approved for operation with the agent release module. Approved Release Output Devices Note: A maximum of 8 Relay Output Modules can be used on the system. Each signal circuit is supervised for open. Each Agent Release Output Module is equipped with a 24 V. E and G Sprinkler Solenoids Figure 3-8. The output type is selected by choosing which terminals terminate the field wiring. Figure 3-9. In Walk Test mode. The installer must select discharge control type required during hardware and software configuration programming.) Reset Switch Trouble LED RELEASE 76-100001-001 1 Module Address Assignment Power for standby and alarm operation of release and signaling outputs shall derive from one of two sources: • Primary supply up to its capacity. in Chapter 1. Refer to paragraph 1-2. The circuit is supervised for open or ground fault conditions.7. Output circuits are Listed for use in Power Limited applications. RELAY 76-100004-001 Manufacturer Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Kidde-Fenwal Various Manufacturers Solenoids 486500 and 48650001 890181 897494 899175 895630 81-100000-001 FM Groups A. for other limitations. Each release output can supervise and activate up to two (2) solenoid control heads. 3-3. in Chapter 1. D.7. the relay output circuit(s) will not operate when the input device(s) under test is activated.7 Agent Release Output Module The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight (8) agent release output modules. The ability for individual output isolate is provided through the system menus. 2: W1 and W2 must be cut when the auxiliary power input is used. See Note 2 • Auxiliary Power Release Circuits } TB1 Input of auxiliary power is hard-wired through terminals 1 and 2 on the module's terminal block. 76-100016-001 3-7 July 2003 . Table 3-2.8 City Tie Module Signal Circuits 12 Note 1: A maximum of 8 of this type module can be used in the system. short and ground fault conditions. which provide up to eight (8) possible release circuits and twenty-four (24) signal outputs on these modules. The agent release output circuit is rated for 24 Vdc control devices. Details 3-3. (See Figure 3-9. The module has an amber LED to signify disconnect status.PEGAsys™ logic program. Agent Release Output Module. The ability for individual release output isolate is provided through the system menu. Details The City Tie Module (Figure 3-10) provides connection and operation for Local Energy or Shunt-type Master Boxes and Reverse Polarity styles of output. Style “Y” 24 Vdc polarity reversing type indicating circuits. Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush currents has been made. B.

RDCM Keypad 3-3. Network Interface Card 3-8 July 2003 R15 U14 R17 U16 R32 C25 C1 The remote display control modules permit system events to be displayed.0 Amp. short and ground fault.10 ATM Series Driver Modules The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphical annunciators and large numbers of auxiliary relays to be used with the PEGAsys Control Unit. In addition. Refer to the ATM Series Installation and Operation Manual. The City Tie Module will operate during the PEGAsys "FailSoft” mode. INC. event output control. Shunt-Type Output: Unsupervised contact rated at 5. S2 S1 LK16 LK17 LK32 Out B Out A In B In A ATM-L/R W1 LK15 LK14 LK12 +24 V Com PS Flt Earth Gnd A B Trouble Sup. Reverse Polarity-Type Output: Unsupervised output for trip circuit wiring only. Figure 3-13. ATM Module 3-3.) Q4 Q3 R42 U8 1 R26 R28 R27 C17 1 1 R31 C15 R38 C24 Q1 1 Q2 1 U6 R18 ASHLAND. 24 Vdc.9 Remote Display Control Modules U12 CR2 K2 CR1 K3 K1 C27 1 U13 RV11 R23 CR3 RV12 RV10 E1 R24 RV5 RV7 RV1 C23 E8 R25 R6 R5 R4 R3 E7 E3 E6 E5 E4 E2 + C3 1 + R43 C10 R33 C9 1 C8 R7 R1 U15 1 U17 C22 U10 U9 R34 Refer to Appendix L for a complete discussion of the PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module and the Remote Display Module. current limited at 550 mA. Reverse Polarity output circuits are listed for use in Power Limited applications.PEGAsys™ System Status Display AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE 1 SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET 2 3 4 SILENCE SCROLL 5 Note: Only 1 City Tie Module can be connected to the system. R14 R20 R41 R40 U20 1 U19 1 U18 1 1 R21 R2 R36 C2 C18 R13 CITY TIE 76-100002-001 R 6 7 8 9 0 Figure 3-11. 24 Vdc. and operator intervention. 3-3. Figure 3-10. Monitored for open. Any system alarm will cause the output to transfer. the output has provisions for manual disable or isolate through the system menu. MA 01721 C7 KIDDE-FENWAL. Refer to Appendix J for a complete discussion of the PEGAsys Network Interface Card and system networking capabilities. The initiation of a walk test will create a system trouble. (See Figure 3-11. current limited at 100 mA.11 Network Interface Card The Network Interface Card allows multiple PEGAsys Control Units to be combined into an integrated. the city notification outputs shall be disabled. 24 Vdc resistive. NO. from more than one location in a facility. Part Number 06-236179-002. 74-200036-001 J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1 B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 N2 C26 N1 I2 I1 1 D TB4 TB2 TB3 TB1 K4 RV6 RV4 RV8 RV9 RV2 RV3 R46 R45 C20 U2 1 R10 C13 Y1 C12 U11 GND +5 TP1 TP2 I1 TP3 TP4 TP5 1 U3 C14 U4 TP6 N1 N2 I2 + U7 C4 R22 C5 C11 U5 1 U21 R44 C16 1 R12 1 R19 R29 + 76-100016-001 . Details Local Energy-Type Output: Monitored output for trip circuit wiring and Master Box coil status (Set/Unset). In Walk Test mode. for a complete description of the ATM Series Driver Modules. See Appendix I for further installation details. peer-topeer network for annunciation. City Tie Module. Out Pre Alm Alarm Pwr On Lamp Test Com Ack Reset Silence Drill LK10 LK8 LK6 LK4 16 15 LK13 14 13 12 LK11 11 10 9 LK9 8 7 LK7 6 5 4 LK5 3 2 LK3 1 LK1 LK31 LK29 LK27 LK25 LK23 LK21 32 31 30 29 28 27 LK26 26 25 LK24 24 23 22 LK22 21 20 LK20 19 18 17 LK30 LK28 LK18 LK19 LK2 Figure 3-12. and operator intervention to be accomplished. causing the city tie output to transfer to the trouble state. Sil. NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CAT.

The devices then report status as required to the control panel. SmartOne Heat detectors have an unobtrusive low-profile look. Manual Release. The blink rates and associated status levels are as follows: Blink Rate 9 Second Rate 2 Second Rate Off (not blinking) Operation Status Normal mode Alarm (activated) Trouble condition The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true distributed intelligence. (See Figure 3-15. Calibration. addressable. microprocessorbased smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. This unique utilization of processing power makes possible a system of loop devices with greater capacity and flexibility than any typical addressable device system with centralized processing. which responds to a broad range of smoldering and flaming type fires. which senses both visible and invisible smoke. A unique sensing chamber permits 360° of smoke entry and response. such as water flow and tamper switches. Typical Detector 3-3. 3-9 July 2003 76-100016-001 . photoelectric type detector. Calibration. and when activated. Model PSD-7152 is an analog. The contact monitor is also used to interface to the Manual Alarm. the LED will flash every nine (9) seconds. which allows the device to indicate its current operating status. Manual Release and Abort Stations.16 The SmartOne Ionization smoke detector provides true distributed intelligence. Each loop device communicates with the RX/TX module over the PC (power/communications) line. device address. Model CPD-7052 is a dual chamber. Calibration. Each detector is electronically addressable and can be fully field programmed. which does not respond to rate of rise conditions until its programmed set point is met. device address and pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set points are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory. Its default setting is Alarm when programmed using the AutoLearn function. Manual Alarm. ionization type detector. and are available using the following: • 3-3. microprocessor-based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. SmartOne Ionization detectors have an unobtrusive low profile look. addressable. in trouble condition.PEGAsys™ 3-3. Model THD-7252 is an analog fixed temperature. to the PEGAsys system. This “Distributed Intelligence” architecture allows each loop device to make decisions within the monitored area. Each SmartOne device contains a status LED which blinks in various patterns to indicate device status. Abort. Figure 3-14. In normal standby mode.12 Field Devices 3-3.) The unit includes a connection for an optional status LED. pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set point are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory. and are available using the following: • Model CPD 7052 SmartOne Ionization Detector: P/N 70-402001-100 The PEGAsys Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allows an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm devices. Each detector is electronically addressable and can be fully field programmed. pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set points and drift compensation algorithm are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory.15 Model PSD 7152 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector: P/N 71-402001-100 SmartOne Heat Detector The SmartOne heat detectors provide true distributed intelligence. SmartOne photoelectric detectors have an unobtrusive low profile look. The addressable contact monitor device is programmable to report the following events: Alarm (default). A unique sensing chamber permits 360° of smoke entry and response. Each of the SmartOne devices features an intrinsic microprocessor with 4K of nonvolatile memory. Supervisory and Normal (Silent input).14 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector The SmartOne Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm Devices provides the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat detection as well as the necessary monitoring and control functions required by advanced fire alarm systems. device address. A typical detector is shown in Figure 3-14. addressable. the LED will flash every two (2) seconds. microprocessor-based heat detection to the PEGAsys system. A unique sensing chamber permits 360° of heat entry and response. Unique algorithms are used to compensate for heat rise without problems associated with false alarms due to elevated rates of rise in ambient temperature. Each detector is electronically addressable and can be fully field programmed. the LED will be extinguished. thermistor-type detector. Trouble. and are available using the following: • Model THD 7252 SmartOne Heat Detector: P/N 70-404001-100 Addressable Contact Input Device The following three paragraphs describe each type of available detector. Waterflow Alarm.13 SmartOne Ionization Detector 3-3. analog. Each device constantly monitors its surrounding environment and makes decisions in response to that information.

INC. INSTALL. Typical N.18 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting particles of combustion in air handling systems. 400 MAIN ST. Upon smoke detection. The isolators will open the loop between two isolators in the presence of a short circuit condition.0 A @ 30 Vdc (inductive) N/O COM N/C 7 6 5 Field Connections (+) PC Line In (-) Figure 3-16. Addressable Contact Input Device 3-3. The device connects directly to the RX/TX multiplex loop and contains an SPDT relay for control of auxiliary equipment. the LED will be extinguished.0 A @ 30 Vdc (resistive) 1. 3-19 and 3-20. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: SmartOne TM MODEL AI. which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions (NFPA 72.6 A @ 120 Vac 2. A transparent Lexan® cover over the detection chamber allows visual inspection of the duct detector chamber and the internal smoke detector status. The device can be activated through the system EOC or RTC programming. Its default operation programming is done during the AutoLearn function. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. the LED will flash every nine (9) seconds. Addressable Relay Output Device July 2003 3-10 76-100016-001 TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED MODEL AO CAT. TEMP.) . the system can be programmed to control a variety of devices such as HVAC fans and power shutdown which can prevent unnecessary damage to a facility. N/O CAT. In normal standby mode.) • Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing: P/N 70-403001-100 Model DH-2000 CPDI Air Duct Housing with Ion Detector: P/N 70-403001-052 Model DH-2000 PSDI Air Duct Housing with Photo Detector: P/N 70-403001-152 (+) PC Line (-) In (+) (-) PC Line Out EOL (10KW Resistor) Typical N. NO. ENCLOSURE END PLUG INLET TUBE (SUPPLY) OR CTCT TE L0 DU DE DE 0 O-20 MH D EXHAUST TUBE (MOLDED INTO ENCLOSURE) MTG. in trouble condition. The unit includes an intrinsic status LED. Supervisory Devices Remote LED (Optional) 1 ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED MAX. ASHLAND. INSTALL. 400 MAIN ST.O. NO. ASHLAND.17 Addressable Relay Output Device The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) provides the PEGAsys system with a Form C.19 Loop Isolator Devices (+) (-) PC Line Out The SmartOne series of loop devices offer optional loop isolation. The duct housing accepts either the PSD-7152 or CPD7052 smoke detectors.) • Addressable Relay Output Device: P/N 70-408004-001 Form C contact rated at: 0. Initiating Devices 3-3.PEGAsys™ • • Addressable Contact Input Device (NO): P/N 70-407008-001. DH-2000 Air Duct Housing 3-3. (See Figures 3-18. 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001 Figure 3-15. TEMP.C. INC. a trouble indication for the devices affected by the isolation will be created on the panel. and in activated condition. the LED will flash every two (2) seconds. which allows the device to indicate its current operating status. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: SmartOne TM PC PC PC PC SW SWLED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PC PC PC PC (+) (-) (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 N/C PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) 5 COM 2 6 3 N/O 7 4 5 6 7 8 EOL (10KW Resistor) • • Refer to DH-2000 Installation Manual (P/N 06-235398-001) for further details. Style 7). However. Sampling of the air in the duct is accomplished through the use of sampling tubes. SCREW AND O-RING DETECTOR HEAD ION OR PHOTO COVER DETECTOR VIEW PORT Figure 3-17. 70-408004-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235577-001 MAX. The isolators will return to normal operation when the short condition has been removed from the affected wires. dry contact interface for remote control applications. which extend into the HVAC duct. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. (See Figure 3-17. ( See Figure 3-16. thus allowing the remainder of the loop to operate normally. Addressable Contact Input Device (NC): P/N 70-407008-002.

20 PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) • Used in conjunction with an ORION™ XT. Note: 3-3. Allows the unit to be mounted behind a smoke detector in the 6-inch detector base. MA 01721 Figure 3-18. PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD The ORION XT HSSD is configured via a computer running ORION Configuration Software (OCS). ASHLAND. (See Figure 3-22. the LED will be on continuously. P/N 06-236005-401.) The PALM allows an HSSD to be monitored like a SmartOne initiating device. Loop Isolator. Version 2.) Figure 3-19. LISTED R REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL P/N 74-200016-001 FOR MODULE INSTALL. Addressable AlarmLine Module LOOP ISOLATOR RX/TX R Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Addressable AlarmLine Module 76-100016-001 3-11 July 2003 . • • • Loop Isolator RX/TX mount: P/N 74-200012-001 Loop Isolator Stand-alone (Single Gang): P/N 74-200012-002 Loop Isolator 6-inch detector base mount: P/N 74-200012-004 SHORT-1 SHORT-2 400 Main Street Ashland. the PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module permits direct connection of a High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector (HSSD) to the signaling line circuit of the PEGAsys Control Unit. (See Figure 3-21. Direct mount. The single gang mount unit includes intrinsic status LEDs which allow the device to indicate in which direction the short condition is being detected. In normal standby mode. All configuration data and smoke history is stored in the ORION XT. operation and maintenance manual. MA 01721 J1 DS2 DS1 Figure 3-21.PEGAsys™ The loop isolators are offered in three package styles: • • Stand-alone style. the LED will be extinguished and in activated condition. it must then be 'Registered' at the PEGAsys CCM. 6-inch Detector Base Mount. PALM loop addresses may also be set from the CCM (default setting is 1000) in the same fashion as other loop modules.21 PALM addresses cannot be set via the hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001). Loop Isolator. OCS may also be used to set the PALM RX/TX loop address. if the address is set in this fashion. Refer to Appendix M for a full description of this Module. INC. Loop Isolator. RX/TX Mount The Addressable AlarmLine Module (AAM) permits an AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys Control Unit.0. Detailed information about the PALM can be found in the ORION XT installation. 6-inch Detector Base Mount Figure 3-22. Stand-Alone TM R Underwriters Laboratories LISTED Figure 3-20. PROCEDURES KIDDE-FENWAL. Both pre-alarm and alarm signals are reported. Housed in a single gang electrical box arrangement. Mounts directly onto the RX/TX module. 3-3. However.

S. OUTPUT CKT. ASHLAND. INC.A. (See Figure 3-23. CAT. NO.POWER LIMITED DEVICE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _ A B A B PC LINE TM AUX./AUDIO MODE SETTINGS ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM) AUX.POWER LIMITED ALL OTHERS . The ASM is designed to mount in a standard electrical box. + AUDIO MODE P1=1&2 S1=3 ON + - + - - + UL R FM APPROVED Figure 3-23. MA 01721 U. 70-200200-001 INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001 PC LINE TERMINALS .) AUXILIARY MODE P1=2&3 S1=1&2 ON KIDDE-FENWAL. Refer to Appendix K for additional details on the Addressable Signal/Sounder Module. IN TROUBLE CKT.PEGAsys™ 3-3. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module July 2003 3-12 76-100016-001 .22 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module The Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) permits notification appliances to be controlled via commands issued from the PEGAsys Control Unit’s signaling line circuit.

PEGAsys™ CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 3. 5. This test allows the user to check the system display LEDs. The step-by-step procedure to perform the loop device test follows: Note: Addressable output modules and PALM modules cannot be tested with this procedure.X*** Where XX. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. The CCM will report a result of the test for each device tested. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. 4-3. These procedures should be accomplished on a scheduled basis. Verify that the display reads: START DEVICE TEST TEST DEVICES FROM _ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _ 4. Press the number two (2) key.X corresponds to the CCM Firmware Version. Press the number four (4) key. ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SILENCE The scheduled maintenance of the system should be performed at an established interval. refer to Chapter 5 for corrective action. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Press the return (↵) key. Press the return (↵) key. Press the zero (0) key. c. 4-3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The following paragraphs outline general scheduled maintenance procedures to be performed on an as-necessary basis. c. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST 2. 76-100016-001 4-1 July 2003 . and then press the return button. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST 1. Verify the display scrolls through each selected address and reads as below: START DEVICE TEST TESTING (Device Address #) 2. The test actually stimulates the detection chamber of the device and verifies the response from the device. Press the number four (4) key. Ensure the following LEDs are momentarily lit: 4-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter contains maintenance instructions for the PEGAsys™. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. which allows a user to initiate a test of the detection devices through the use of the system menus and verify that the detection device(s) is operating as intended. In the event that system problems are found during the performance of a procedure. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 3. Enter the device address or range of device addresses to be tested. The step-by-step procedure to perform the lamp test follows: 1. Press the zero (0) key. Press the number one (1) key. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b.1 Lamp Test The PEGAsys system provides a unique detector test function. All system outputs must be isolated prior to running this test procedure.2 Note: Loop Device Test This test has a pass or fail result. The interval that the maintenance procedures are performed should not exceed any imposed regulations (NFPA 72 or local codes). Verify that the display reads: ***LAMP TEST*** ***VERSION XX. It will not activate alarm outputs on the system. 4-2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AC POWER PRE-ALARM SUPERVISORY 4-3.

The status LED of the detector will flash at a two (2) second rate during the alarm period. Upon the completion of the test the display will read: TEST ON PS(_ _) COMPLETED >_>_ _. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. WALK TEST PROCEDURE 2. and if the product is used as directed in the instructions. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST with a time and date stamp. Verify that the voltage is within allowable tolerances. To place a detector into alarm.4. Take care during the heating of the detector to avoid overheating the plastic housing. The related signal circuit will only be pulsed if it has been configured for the Walk Test feature when defining it in the PCS software. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 4-2 76-100016-001 July 2003 . Aerosol smoke simulation may be used if acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. the system enters each activation • 4-3. c. The system's signal outputs default to walk test disabled. Heat Detectors–When testing SmartOne heat detectors. use of a low powered heat gun is acceptable. When a sufficient amount of smoke has entered the device. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. During the system installation/configuration via PCS. Maintain a minimum of one (1) foot between the detector and the heat gun nozzle. The operator can then print out all walk test results for review. Press the return (↵) key. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. Apply smoke to the detector for a minimum of ten (10) seconds. Press the number four (4) key.2. 4-3. creates a potentially hazardous practice. use a "punk-stick" or "cotton wick" to generate smoke. When walk test is activated and carried out. Verify that the display reads: BATTERY TEST BATTERY TEST ON PS*_ _ 4. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST 2.4 Walk Test The PEGAsys system provides a one person walk test function. Press the number four (4) key. the installer needs to enable each signal circuit installed in the system for “Walk Test”. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. Press the number three (3) key. When the device testing is completed the display will read: TEST COMPLETED (Address #) TEST (PASSED or FAILED) 7.2 The step-by-step procedure to perform the walk test is as follows: 1. When a sufficient amount of heat has been detected by the detector.1 When the walk test is active.4. The system will respond to each activation with a short burst of the programmed signal circuits. Note: 4-3.4. The step-by-step procedure to perform the battery test follows: 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. The walk test feature can be deactivated two ways: the service person can deactivate it through the user menus. Heat the detector for a minimum of ten (10) seconds. then proceed through the installation activating the specified devices. the control panel will respond with an alarm. Press the zero (0) key. Press the zero (0) key. Verify the display reads: BATTERY TEST TEST ACTIVATED ON PS(_ _) 5. c. if desired. which in turn.3 Battery Test This test allows the user to activate a battery test to verify battery capacity. Press the return (↵) key. WALK TESTING DETECTORS Place the system in walk test. the panel will annunciate a trouble condition. The status LED of the detector will flash at a two (2) second rate during the alarm period. the control panel will respond with an alarm indication. perform the applicable procedure below: • Smoke Detectors–When testing SmartOne® smoke detectors. as described in Paragraph 4-3. Enter the power supply address which the batteries are connected to. 4-3._V 6. This allows the service person to enable a group of devices for walk test. or the walk test function will time out after ten (10) minutes of non-activation (this ensures system response if the service person is called away for an extended period of time). Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 3. Type in the Level 2 password.PEGAsys™ 6. Use of open flame devices is not recommended as discoloration of the plastic housing is likely. Press the <SCROLL> button to read the status of each device tested.

Verify that the display reads: ALARM SIMULATION TEST 1:ACTIVATE 2:DE-ACTIVATE 7. IMPORTANT"Testing personnel shall be familiar with the specific arrangement and operation of the suppression system(s) and releasing function(s) and be cognizant of the hazards associated with inadvertent system discharge. 2. including disconnection of releasing solenoids/electric actuators. Verify that the display reads: 4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST 5. Verify that the display reads: 1:START WALK TEST 2:STOP WALK TEST 5. The step-by-step procedure to perform the AST follows: 1. closing of valves. 3. are understood. Press the number four (4) key. 76-100016-001 4-3 July 2003 . 9. other actions. 4. 4-3. Press the number one (1) key. Be sure to observe the above warning." "Testing shall include verification that the releasing circuits and components energized or actuated by the fire alarm system are electrically supervised and operate as intended on alarm. Type in the selected device address and then press the return key. After completion of the walk test." "Suppression systems and releasing components shall be returned to their normal condition upon completion of system testing." 4-3. Chapter 10. 4-4 DISARMING AND REARMING RELEASE CIRCUITS The disarming and rearming procedures which follow must be performed when testing the PEGAsys system. Press the return (↵) key.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) The PEGAsys system provides a feature that allows the system installer/inspector to verify the actual output operation in relation to the input(s) that are programmed to activate the output of interest. Verify that the system responds as programmed. Press the <SCROLL> button. c. Type in the Level 2 password.1 AST PROCEDURE 2. be sure the notes below from NFPA 72. or combinations thereof. Press the zero (0) key.PEGAsys™ 3." "Occupant notification shall be required whenever a fire alarm system configured for releasing service is being serviced or tested. The user would have to disable the AST when output operation has been verified. Verify that the display reads: 4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST 4. Press number two (2) key and then return (↵). Note: 1. for the duration of the fire system testing. Prior to proceeding. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST 3. The service person would enable the AST function for a particular input and the system would operate the output(s) as it is programmed in the Event Output Control program. Verify that the display reads: ALARM SIMULATION TEST DETECTOR ADDRESS _ _ _ _ 6. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b. the pre-programmed outputs for the activated input(s) will activate. Press the number four (4) key. ! WARNING Any outputs that are controlling critical processes or agent releasing should be physically disconnected from the process or agent container to avoid unwanted shutdowns and/or agent releases. Press the number one (1) key and then the return key. Verify that the display reads: START DEVICE WALK TEST WALK TEST STARTED ON LOOP( _ _) 6. Suppression systems shall be secured from inadvertent actuation." "Discharge testing of suppression systems shall not be required by this code. Press the number five (5) key. press the number two (2) key to disable the walk test mode. b. Press the <SCROLL> button. Verify that the display reads: 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 5. Press the <ACKLDGE> button to acknowledge the alarm. 8. 4. Repeat steps 2 through 8.5. The system will respond with an alarm condition when the AST feature is enabled. Deactivate the AST programming as follows: a. When the AST function is enabled. as appropriate for the specific system. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a.

1 POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM Power-Down Procedure e. Verify that the display reads as follows: MAIN PROCESSOR POWER ON d. 5. The system is now in full operation in accordance with system programming. perform step 2. Press the return (↵) key. Press the zero (0) key. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. 4. 3. Set time and date as follows: aa.PEGAsys™ 4-4. Press the <ACKLDGE> button.i. in some cases. 2. ! WARNING 1. energize the system by performing the following steps: a. i. 6.2 Arming Release Circuits Perform the following step-by-step procedure upon completion of system testing. Remove DC power first by disconnecting the batteries. Verify that the display reads "Main Processor Power On". b. After approximately one minute the display for each RX/TX will momentarily read: RXTX "N" NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF Note: "N" will sequentially correspond to each RX/TX in the system. The procedure to power-down the system is as follows: 1. Disarm release circuits as per Paragraph 4-4. 2. De-isolate agent release circuit(s). Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators are lit. Ensure that all control heads or solenoids are disconnected from the storage containers to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. Verify that the audible device is silenced. 2. Verify the display reads the correct time and date. Press the display module reset switch. 3. July 2003 4-4 76-100016-001 .1. 3. ! CAUTION h. 4-4. After ten (10) seconds. f. all manual activation. 4. g. 4-5 4-5. Reconnect the control heads or solenoids at the storage containers. Type in the default first level password (987). This initialization can take up to 90 seconds.1). Ensure that the audible device is buzzing continuously.4. The suppression system is now fully disarmed from all automatic activation and. If the system has been powered down. Also ensure that any supervisory or trouble events have been acknowledged. Physically remove the control heads or solenoids at the storage containers. If the incorrect time is displayed. Connect the backup batteries to the power supply in accordance to the procedure in Chapter 7.1). Remove AC power second by shutting off the circuit breaker to the panel. 2. Verify that all control heads or solenoids are disconnected from storage containers.1 Disarming Release Circuits 4-6 4-6. Ensure that the panel does not have any active alarms to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. ! WARNING Use safety precautions when removing solenoids to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. The system can now be tested without the risk of an inadvertent release of agent.1 POWERING UP THE SYSTEM Power-Up Procedure Perform the following step-by-step procedure prior to system testing. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD bb.4. verify that the display reads as follows: RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON RXTX1 Note: The RX/TX message will repeat itself for each RX/ TX module in the system while the system initializes itself. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu (refer to Paragraph 2-5. Ensure the system is free of any alarms to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. 1. powerup of the panel will cause a reactivation of the alarm sequence and possible activation of the suppression system. 1. cc. c. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu (refer to Paragraph 2-5. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST If alarms do exist during power-down.

76-100016-001 4-5 July 2003 . 3. Type in 3111 on the keypad.PEGAsys™ dd.2. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM) ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM) ee. as in steps dd and ee above. gg. Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then MM=minutes 0-59). Rearm release circuit per Paragraph 4-4. Set the date in an analogous procedure. Verify that the display reads: SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM) 1:AM 2:PM ff. Press the return key. Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for PM).

July 2003 4-6 76-100016-001 .PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

3-23 3-3.11 3-3. ! WARNING The PEGAsys system utilizes internal programming for continuous system testing. Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Index. such as shorted transformers or wiring. See Table 5-1.8 3-3. Ensure battery and line voltages are checked prior to troubleshooting the system.2 7-7.1 3-3.3 1-2. or both.3 7-7.6 All service to panel must be done with panel powered down to prevent damage to panel components. 5-2.6 3-3.2 3-3.5 3-3.19 3-3.20 3-3.2 5-4.12 3-3.16 3-3. 5-2.22 Appendix K 76-100016-001 5-1 July 2003 .7 3-3.18 3-3. Some faults. obtain information about any changes taking place that may affect the system.5 3-3. 5-2 STANDARD FAULT-ISOLATION TECHNIQUES Failure of the PEGAsys system to function properly will usually be caused by one or more of the following faults: • • • Failure of the power supply Damaged or faulty wiring Component failure Relay Output Module Agent Release Module City Tie Module Remote Display Modules ATM Series Driver Modules Network Interface Card Field Device Addressable Contact Input Device Addessable Relay Output Device Air Duct Housing Loop Isolators PALM for use with ORION XT HSSD Addressable AlarmLine Module Addressable Signal/Sounder Module When a failure occurs and the cause is not known.6 and 33.1 Visual Inspection When troubleshooting.17 3-3. This chapter also provides instructions for the removal and replacement of the replaceable modules/devices of the PEGAsys system. Look for loose connections.PEGAsys™ CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-1 INTRODUCTION 5-3 TROUBLESHOOTING The effectiveness of this chapter is greatly increased by first reading the entire manual. Check for smoke or the odor of burned or overheated parts.10 3-3.4 Appendix L Manual P/N 06-236179-002 Appendix J 5-4. the fault may often be discovered through visual inspection alone. Most system faults can be isolated through the operation of the front panel.9 3-3. If possible. Troubleshooting Index Module/Device Central Control Module Receiver/Transmitter Module Power Supply Module Multi-Loop Motherboard Basic Motherboard Signal Output Module Detailed Illustration 3-3 3-4 3-5 1-7 and 3-6 1-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 thru 3-20 3-21 3-22 Functional Description Paragraph 3-3. Visual inspection is also useful in avoiding damage to the system which could occur through improper servicing methods.5 and 7-7. check as many of these items as is practical before starting a detailed check.1 7-7.2 Power Checks Many faults on the system can be caused by problems with power. can be located by sight or smell. Users/technicians can initiate various testing via the use of the system menu (refer to Paragraph 2-5) after entering a valid password. The service technician must have a sure understanding of the purpose and correct function of the module/device before attempting corrective maintenance.4 7-15 7-16 See Manual Replacement Procedure 5-4. and the paragraphs of this chapter for troubleshooting beyond visual inspection. This chapter contains instructions to aid a technician in locating faulty modules/devices.3 7-7. personnel injury.100 Appendix M 7-5 7-7.4 1-2.21 See Manual 77.

Remove new RX/TX module from packing and inspect for physical damage. (See Figure 5-1 or 5-2. Multi-Loop Installation 76-100016-001 . The procedures should also be used to assist in module and device installation. The settings are used to set the wiring style ( 4.2 The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure for replacing the CCM. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM in place. 3. Single Loop Installation 5-4. The following paragraphs provide required tools and stepby-step replacement procedures for the PEGAsys. • • • • • • Small Flat-Blade Screwdriver 6" Flat-Blade Screwdriver No. 5-4. Remove CCM from cabinet. 6. 6. Remove the plug from the RS-232 port. 5. 6 or 7). See Appendix I for the jumper locations on the RX/TX module. Remove all field wiring and internal cables. 4. 1. ! CAUTION Some components are subject to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). These components are not to be removed from their protective wrappings until they are to be installed in their respective equipment locations. Ensure all programming is saved using PCS software.PEGAsys™ 5-4 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 1. 2. 2 cross-head Screwdriver Wire Stripper Small Needle Nose Pliers Ground Strap Central Control Module Figure 5-1. 2. Table 5-2 lists the types of allowable configurations you can select along with their respective jumpers. Depending on the system configuration. 3.1 Required Tools The following tools will be required to perform the removal and replacement procedures. with 7 being used with loop isolators. 5. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/TX Module conform to the wiring style of the system being installed. July 2003 5-2 /TX RX DULE MO Figure 5-2. and then only by personnel connected to earth ground. Ensure jumper configuration is set. Remove the two mounting screws from the module and move module to gain access to connected wiring. Remove new CCM from packing and inspect for physical damage.) Ensure that the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the procedure. Install new RX/TX in the reverse order of the removal steps (listed above). 4. The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6 wiring style.3 RX/TX Module LE I/O DU MO The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure for replacing the RX/TX module. Remove power plug from connector jack J1. 7. Install new CCM in the reverse order of the removal steps (listed above). Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on the module board. Disconnect plug from terminal T1. 5-4.

Connect the new device to the PC Line where the defective device was removed. 5. Ensure the new device is an exact replacement. Perform the appropriate test listed below: • • Loop Device Test (Paragraph 4-3. RX/TX Configuration Selection Jumper Style 4 Style 6 Style 6 w/ Loop Isolator Shorted Open Open Style 7 W1 and W2 JP2 JP3 Open Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted Open Open Note: Style 7 requires the use of field-installed loop isolators. 3. The RX/TX module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to operate in the Style 7 configuration. Note: Smoke and heat detectors can be replaced without powering down the system. Use the same detector base or electrical box of the defective device. 7. Field Devices 5-4. If the alarm cannot be cleared. 2. 1. the panel will need to be powered down. Remove the defective device from the PC Line.PEGAsys™ Table 5-2. Set the address of the new device to the same as the defective device using the procedure in Paragraph 2-8.2) for AI or automatic initiating device. acknowledge all current system events and power down the system to re-initialize it. physically remove the device from the system. insert the replacement device onto the loop. 76-100016-001 5-3 July 2003 . if not accomplished in the previous step.6. Record the model number and device type.4.4 The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to replace field devices in the PEGAsys system. the alarm must be cleared prior to removal from the system.2) for Detection Devices. Once the system is online. 4. When adding new loop devices to the system. Walk Test (Paragraph 4-3. If device is in alarm. 6. Verify that the model number is the same as the defective device. Identify the defective device to be replaced.

PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. July 2003 5-4 76-100016-001 .

including 8" Wiring Harness (for expansion cabinet) 76-100009-002 76-100009-003 76-100001-001 76-100003-001 76-100004-001 76-100002-001 76-100007-001 76-100017-001 76-100036-500 76-300000-502 76-300000-501 76-200004-032 76-200005-032 76-100008-501/ 76-100008-701 76-100008-600/ 76-100008-800 76-100009-010 76-100005-001 76-100005-002 76-100000-502 76-100000-501 76-100000-600 PART NUMBER 76-100016-001 6-1 July 2003 . Power Supply RX/TX Module for Single Loop System RX/TX Module for Multi-Loop System Main Enclosure MODULES Agent Release Module Signal Output Module Relay Output Module City Tie Module Motherboard for eight (8) Optional Output Modules Multi-Loop Motherboard for up to eight (8) RX/TX or seven (7) Output Modules Network Interface Card Remote Display Control Module Remote Display Module ATM-L Annunciator Driver Board ATM-R Relay Driver Board POWER SUPPLIES Power Supply Module. one Power Supply/Charger Assembly and Enclosure) MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS Central Control Module (CCM).. including 36" Wiring Harness (for main cabinet) Power Supply Module. PEGAsys System Parts List NOMENCLATURE SYSTEMS PEGAsys Control Unit (includes CCM with one RX/TX Module. one Power Supply/ Charger Assembly and Enclosure) PEGAsys Multi-Loop Control Unit (includes CCM with one Multi-Loop Motherboard. one RX/TX Module. Single-Loop Central Control Module (CCM).PEGAsys™ CHAPTER 6 PARTS LIST 6-1 INTRODUCTION The PEGAsys™ system parts list (Table 6-1) provides a list of all repair parts. Multi-Loop Power Supply/Charger Assembly. Table 6-1.. 4 Amp. 4 Amp. includes 4 Amp.

PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued) NOMENCLATURE ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS PEGAsys Expansion Enclosure (order backplane separately) Expansion Backplane.) Addressable Contact Input Device (N. Order sampling tubes that approximate duct width. 12 AH SMARTONE FIELD DEVICES Intelligent Photoelectric Detector. Sampling Tube–24" Sampling Tube–48" Sampling Tube–72" Sampling Tube–96" Sampling Tube–120" Exhaust Tube Kit 6-2 PART NUMBER 76-100000-505 76-100000-006 76-100000-007 76-100000-008 76-100010-001 06-115915-046 89-100052-001 06-115915-047 71-402001-100 70-402001-100 70-404001-100 70-400001-100 70-400001-101 70-407008-001 70-407008-002 77-297103-000 70-408004-001 74-200012-002 74-200012-004 74-200012-001 70-200200-001 73-100001-001 73-100003-001 70-403001-100 70-403001-152 70-403001-052 06-129500-001 06-129500-002 06-129500-003 06-129500-004 06-129500-005 06-129500-006 06-129554-001 July 2003 76-100016-001 .) Addressable Loop Module for ORION™ XT Addressable Relay Output Device Loop Isolator–1 Gang Box Mounted Loop Isolator–Detector Base Mounted Loop Isolator–RXTX Mounted Alarm Signal/Sounder Module Addressable AlarmLine Module Addressable AlarmLine Module in NEMA-4 Enclosure DUCT HOUSING AND COMPONENTS DH-2000 Duct Housing without Detector Installed DH-2000 PSDI–Duct Housing with Photoelectric Detector Installed DH-2000 CPDI–Duct Housing with Ionization Detector Installed Sampling Tube–12". 33 AH Battery 12 V. 17 AH Battery 12 V.C. Model CPD-7052 Intelligent Thermal Detector. Model 6SB 4-inch Universal Detector Base. The number of sampling holes vary with tube length. for Mounting Motherboard and four (4) Power Supplies Expansion Backplane. for Mounting eight (8) Power Supplies Expansion Backplane. Model 4SB Addressable Contact Input Device (N.PEGAsys™ Table 6-1. for Mounting two (2) I/O Motherboards Battery Enclosure for Additional Batteries Battery 12 V. Model PSD-7152 Intelligent Ionization Detector.O. Model THD-7252 6-inch Universal Detector Base.

PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued) NOMENCLATURE MISCELLANEOUS Handheld Device Programmer 6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals 6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems 6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computers DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computer PCS Version 7.X Software PCS Version 8.PEGAsys™ Table 6-1.X Software (for use with ORION XT Detectors) 74-200013-001 74-100016-001 74-100016-002 74-100016-003 06-129341-001 06-129317-003 06-129373-001 76-100035-002 76-100040-001 PART NUMBER 76-100016-001 6-3 July 2003 .

July 2003 6-4 76-100016-001 .PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

To remove the front door. place the bottom two mounting screws in place. To facilitate mounting the enclosure to its wall position. The output bus (communications) and 24 Vdc power are attached to connectors located on the output motherboard. Reinstall the enclosure door at this time. with expansion enclosures located in the same room as the main enclosure. Carefully place the two key holes over the screws in the wall. Allow the enclosure to gently come to rest on the screws. It is designed to be surface or semi-flush mounted using No. Figure 7-1 shows the hole layout of the enclosure mounting area. 7-4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR EXPANSION ENCLOSURES (FLOOR) 16" 44" The PEGAsys Central Control Panel enclosure is 28 inches high x 18 inches wide x 5½ inches deep. Care must be taken when installing the door to ensure that the hinge pins are lined up correctly. Place the mounting screws into the top two holes in the wall. The expansion enclosure maintains the same outside dimensions as the main system enclosure. 76-100016-001 7-1 The expansion enclosure (P/N 76-100000-505) uses a backplate installed in the enclosure to meet various system component requirements. 10 or ¼-inch hardware. CCP Installation Drawing With the enclosure held by the top two screws. There are three versions of the backplate: • • • An output module cardcage with mounting provisions for up to four (4) power supplies Mounting provisions for up to eight (8) power supplies Two motherboard cardcages for mounting up to sixteen (16) output modules in the expansion enclosure. Tighten the screws. Note: The internal communications bus (RS-485) wiring must be enclosed in a raceway from the main enclosure for a maximum run of 20 feet. Installation consists of installing a complete system. Ensure the enclosure has its door hinge sockets located to the left as you face the enclosure. The procedures in this chapter should be accomplished by technicians familiar with fire alarm system installation and the requirements of relevant NFPA regulations. The type of hardware to be used is at the discretion of the installer. July 2003 . open the door approximately 90º from its closed position and lift it up enough to allow the door’s hinge pins to clear their mating hinge sockets located on the left side of the Central Control Panel.PEGAsys™ CHAPTER 7 INSTALLATION 18" 7-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides information necessary to install the PEGAsys™ system. but are required for installation: • • • • • 7-3 No.375" The materials listed below are not supplied with the system. Leave approximately ¼-inch of both screws exposed. but must be in accordance with good electrical and safety practices. The optional output motherboard and output modules must be installed prior to the system being powered up. Tighten the screws. Disconnect the ground wire before removing the door. remove the enclosure’s front door. The lower set of mounting holes should typically be 44 inches from the floor in order for the display panel to be at a convenient viewing height. 7-2 MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION 28" 25. 10 or ¼-inch Mounting Hardware Electrical Conduit for AC Input Power 4-inch Electrical Junction Boxes (as required) Wire-Nuts and Crimp-On Terminals (as required) Ground Strap (for handling printed circuit boards) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL Figure 7-1.

6 or 7). Ensure the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the procedure. 7 being used with loop iso- L G AC IN DC IN 1 R MOTHER BD CCM RET 24V RET 24V SYSTEM POWER R RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. Two Output Motherboards 7-5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OUTPUT MOTHERBOARD The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install an output motherboard into a single-loop system. A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3 B + BAT DC IN 2 ASHLAND. 7-6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR RX/TX MODULE (MULTI-LOOP ONLY) RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C N DS1 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET AC OUT 1 2 L N N L 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure for installing an RX/TX module. INC. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/ TX Module conform to the wiring style of the system being installed. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C N DS1 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N N L L G R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V + BAT DC IN 2 July 2003 76-100016-001 . MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY = Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations) Figure 7-2. Refer to Figure 7-5. A B ASHLAND. 1. A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3 B + BAT DC IN 2 ASHLAND. The settings are used to set the wiring style (4. INC. ASHLAND. 2. Back Plate. To install. position the back plate in the enclosure and fasten it to the seven studs located in the enclosure using the nuts supplied with the enclosure. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3 B N DS1 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N N L L G R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET 24V RET SHR + - 24V RET RET 24V 24V MOTHER BD CCM RET SYSTEM POWER BAT DC IN 2 = Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations) Figure 7-4. MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. Figure 7-4 shows the expansion backplate which provides mounting for two (2) output motherboards. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C 06-129562-001 RET 24V RET W4 DS1 S2 2 1 S1 2 1 S3 24V RET SHR N AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N N L L G AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR MOTHER BD CCM RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. INC. Eight Power Supplies 7-2 06-129562-001 RET 24V RET NO NC C A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3 B N DS1 24V RET SHR AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N N L L G AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET 24V RET SHR + - 24V RET RET 24V 24V MOTHER BD CCM RET SYSTEM POWER BAT DC IN 2 RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. Figure 7-3 shows the expansion backplate which provides mounting for up to eight (8) auxiliary power supplies. See Appendix I for jumper locations on the RX/TX module. Back Plate. Place motherboard on standoffs in the back of the enclosure. The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6 wiring style. Connect the 24 Vdc wiring from the power supply to terminal TB1.PEGAsys™ Figure 7-2. ASHLAND. INC. INC. A W4 S2 S1 2 1 2 1 S3 B + BAT DC IN 2 ASHLAND. Back Plate. shows the expansion backplate which provides mounting for four (4) power supplies and one (1) output motherboard. 4. INC. Output Motherboard and Four Power Supplies = Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations) Figure 7-3. Connect the RJ-12 phone style wire from the MOTHER BD connector (on the power supply) to J9 on the motherboard. Insert and tighten the twelve (12) mounting screws provided with the motherboard. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C N DS1 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N N L L G R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR MOTHER BD CCM RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. 3.

All personnel installing or servicing PEGAsys equipment must wear a grounding strap when working in the Central Control panel to avoid generating static electricity which can destroy integrated circuits. Remove RX/TX module from packing and inspect for physical damage. Install the two mounting screws and tighten until snug. 6. 4. remove the two (2) mounting screws and pull out the module. Set jumpers W1-W3 for appropriate A/B wiring styles. RX/TX Configuration Selection Jumper Style 4 Style 6 Style 6 w/Loop Isolator Shorted Open Open Style 7 W1 and W2 JP2 JP3 Open Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted Shorted Open Open Note: Style 7 requires the use of field-installed loop isolators. The socket selected is dependant upon which slot the RX/TX will be installed into. To remove an output module from the system. 2. See Appendix I for jumper settings. it is recommended that modules performing like functions be placed adjacent to each other to facilitate identification and field wiring runs. INSTALLATION OF OUTPUT MODULES 7-7 LE I/O DU MO /TX RX DULE MO The output modules can be inserted into the motherboard in any order. they should be replaced into the appropriate bags. the address would become RX/TX 4. 2. Install loop isolator. Note: Since the RX/TXs are not addressed by switches. 7-7. remove all power. Table 7-1 lists the types of allowable configurations you can select along with their respective jumpers. adjacent to its communications socket JP1 to JP8. P/N 74-200012-001. a list of output module assignments can be requested from the system menu to verify the registration and accuracy of module address(es). 3. The terminal block which will be used to power the RX/TX will be dependant upon which slot the RX/TX will be installed into. However. 5. Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on the module board. Example: An RX/TX connected to JP1 on the multi-loop motherboard will become RX/TX 1. Loop 1. Always disconnect both AC and battery power before installing or removing modules. remove terminal block from module. Remove the RX/TX by reversing the installation steps (listed above). 76-100016-001 7-3 July 2003 . The following paragraphs describe the installation procedure for each available output module type. the communications socket they are connected to will become their address. The CCM automatically reads the output modules type and address upon PCS configuration upload. When the circuit boards are removed from the motherboard. Set address switches. if used. After powering up the system. Refer to Table 7-1 settings for wiring styles. ! WARNING Output modules should never be installed in a “powered-up” system. 3. Place the RX/TX against the mounting bracket in the PEGAsys.1 Signal Audible Output Module The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a signal audible output module into the PEGAsys system. 6-conductor cable from the RS-232 port on the RX/TX to the appropriate RJ-12 sockets JP1-JP8. Loop 4. 1. 7. ! CAUTION Figure 7-5. If the same RX/TX was moved to JP4.PEGAsys™ lators. Install the short. See Appendix I for address switch settings. Remove the signal audible output module from packing and inspect for physical damage. NEVER PACK THESE BOARDS IN STYROFOAM OR PLASTIC PELLETS. Connect 24 Vdc wiring from terminal block (TB1-TB8) to 24 Vdc input plug J1. Ensure jumper configuration is set. Installation for Multi-Loop Table 7-1. The RX/TX module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to operate in Style 7 configuration. 1. Output module printed circuit boards are shipped in antistatic plastic bags and should be kept in these bags until they are installed.

Remove the agent release module from packing and inspect for physical damage. Power Supply) and monitor module (Main Power Supply). 5. Set switches S3 and S4 for solenoid activation. 5. 2. 2. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws/nuts into the four corners of the mounting plate.2 Relay Output Module The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a relay output module into the PEGAsys system. 5. Refer to Figure 5-1 or 5-2. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Install module into the motherboard. 6. AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (76-100009-002) Figure 7-6. 3. 5. See Appendix I for jumper settings. 7-7. 1. See Figure 7-6 to determine the wiring connections between the switching power supply (Aux. See Appendix I for jumper settings. Ensure the connector mates properly. See Figure 7-7 to determine the wiring connections between the switching power supply (Aux. 7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing and inspect for physical damage. See Appendix I for switch settings.4 City-Tie Output Module The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a city tie output module into the PEGAsys system. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address switch settings. Expansion Enclosure The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a power supply/charger assembly into the expansion enclosure. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the connector mates properly. See Appendix I for address switch settings. Install module in the desired position on the backplate of the main or expansion enclosure. Set address switches. 4. 1.3 Agent Release Module MAIN POWER SUPPLY (76-100009-010) 1. Ensure the connector mates properly. Install module in the motherboard. 3. 7-7. 7-7. Set address switches. Refer to Figure 5-1 or 5-2. Remove the city-tie module from packing and inspect for physical damage. 2. 1. 2. Install module into the motherboard.PEGAsys™ 4. Insert and tighten mounting screws. 4. See Appendix I for address switch settings. See Appendix I. Power Supply) and monitor module (Main Power Supply). Set module configuration. 4. 4. 3. Install module in the desired position on the backplate of the expansion enclosure. Refer to Figure 51 or 5-2. 2. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing and inspect for physical damage. See Appendix I for address switch settings. Refer to Figure 5-1 or 5-2. Insert and tighten mounting screws. 3. 4. 6. 6. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Cut jumper between W1 and W2 if using an auxiliary 24 Vdc power input.5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install a power supply/charger assembly into the PEGAsys system. Ensure the connector mates properly. 1. July 2003 7-4 attribute ? attribute ? 24V RET SPV AC OUT 2 1 attribute ? AC IN DC IN 1 attribute ? attribute ? SHARE DC IN 2 WHT BLK/WHT BLK BLK VIO RED RED ORN 76-100016-001 . Remove the relay output module from packing and inspect for physical damage. Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram 7-7. Cut jumper between W9 and W10 if using an auxiliary 24 Vdc power input. 3. Set address switches. WHT BLK/WHT ORN RED RED BLK BLK VIO SPV RET 24V N L N L attribute ? L N attribute ? G The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to install an agent release module into the PEGAsys system.

For Power Limited Circuits use Type FPL. per NFPA and UL requirements. The terminating resistor is used to ensure good RS485 communications. Power Supply Module Connections to Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly Aux. RS-485 Connection 7-8 CONNECTING AC POWER 7-7. This connection allows the installer to connect a twisted-pair.e. except from the last power supply unit or motherboard in the expansion enclosure. and all in-line motherboard terminating jumpers must also be removed. This will maintain the terminating resistor at the end of the RS-485 circuit.. Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure 6.) DC Output (Neg.7 Power Supply Communication Connections The main power supply communicates with the CCM over the internal RS-485 bus of the PEGAsys system. This connection must be daisy-chained to other power supplies in the expansion enclosure. Loop the RS-485 wiring. 15 Amp circuit breaker. ! WARNING High voltages may be present when connecting AC power to the Central Control Panel. Power supply in main enclosure to motherboard in main enclosure: a flat 6-conductor phone type cable is attached to “CON 2” of power supply and then inserted into the RJ-12 jack on the motherboard labeled “RS485”. These two examples are accomplished as follows: 1. to a motherboard or other power supply installed in an expansion enclosure. FPLP or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760. and can be connected in different ways. Ensure that the circuit breaker at the dedicated AC power source is in the OFF position. Figure 7-8. Do not use T-tapping. i. The conduit must be attached to the right side of the Central Control Panel enclosure through one of the knockouts near the upper right corner of the enclosure.) Supervision Share Main Supply AC Out 2 N AC Out 2 L DC In 2 24V DC In 2 Ret DC In 2 Supv Share attribute ? SPV N G DC IN 1 DC IN 2 Figure 7-8. 2. if installed. Power supplies installed in an expansion enclosure without a motherboard can use the RS-485 terminal block (TB1). July 2003 . which is required to ensure proper operation of the RS-485 communications. Suitable precautions must be taken to avoid injury.PEGAsys™ N AC OUT 1 2 AC IN attribute ? L N L WHT BLK/WHT attribute ? L MAIN POWER SUPPLY (76-100009-010) attribute ? 24V RET attribute ? SPV SHARE attribute ? 24V RET ORN RED RED BLK BLK VIO AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (76-100009-003) attribute ? Figure 7-7. The bus extends out of the power supply when needed. The AC power cable is to be run through a conduit from a dedicated. as shown in 76-100016-001 7-5 AC power must be provided to the Central Control Panel’s internal power supply using three conductors. Attach the three AC power conductors to TB1 on the Central Control Panel power supply PCB (see Appendix I). Jumper W4 must be removed from all power supplies in line. Remove jumper “W4” on the main power supply to enable the terminating resistor on the motherboard. 18 AWG cable to terminals A and B of TB1 on the power supply in the main enclosure and connect to the same terminals on the power supply in the expansion enclosure. See Appendix A for AC branch circuit requirement details. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws into the four corners of the mounting plate. Table 7-2. Note: All Non-Power-Limited wiring must be routed away from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of ¼inch. Aux. Pow er Supply White Black/White Red Black Violet Orange Function AC Input (Neutral) AC Input (Hot) DC Output (Pos. The power supply unit in the main enclosure of the PEGAsys system communicates with the CCM over a short phone style cable.

(See Figure 7-9. The conduit. must be attached through any convenient Central Control Panel enclosure knockout. The cable connecting the field devices to the RX/TX module provides power and bi-directional communications to the loop devices. shown in Figure 7-9 (P/N 76-100010-001). Note: All Non-Power Limited wiring must be routed away from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of ¼inch.) VENT BOTH SIDES KNOCKOUTS FOR . Refer to Appendix E for FM Pre-Action/Deluge sprinkler requirements for 90-hour standby periods.25 microFarad. The enclosure is designed to be surface mounted using only hardware similar to that used on the CCP (see Paragraph 7-3) and must be mounted within 100 feet of the panel.25“ RX/TX Module Figure 7-9. 18 AWG minimum twisted. Wiring the RX/TX PC Line 7-10.1 Battery Enclosure Do not connect the batteries to the system power supply at this time. Connection to the power supply must be according to the instructions in Appendix I. When installing new wiring or using existing wiring.50 CONDUIT (3 PLACES) DOOR 0.1 The RX/TX PC line uses Broadcast Indexing Protocol (BIP) for communications with intelligent loop devices. Unshielded Wire TB1 The batteries should be rated for standby power use and fit within the physical dimensions of the respective enclosure.PEGAsys™ 7-9 INSTALL AND CONNECT DC POWER ! CAUTION Space is provided within the Central Control Panel for two 12 V. existing wiring can be used as long as it meets NEC 760 and NFPA 72 requirements. Connect the batteries at the end of system installation. In retrofit applications. is used to house up to two 12 V. 7-9. Tighten the slot screws firmly. Conduit to CCP July 2003 7-6 76-100016-001 . The PC Line may be configured in NFPA-72 Style 4. 6 or 7. Twisted.94“ 18“ 12“ * * * * * 20“ 8. One RX/TX module can support up to 255 SmartOne® addressable field devices. FPLP or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760. Note: Wiring for the batteries to the power supply must be sized accordingly to prevent unacceptable voltage drops. it is necessary to check line resistance and capacitance.17 AH (P/N 06-115915-046) Power Sonic 12330. The PC line to the loop devices can be run in conduit to the Central Control Panel cabinet. if used. 33 AH (3 sets) (P/N 89-100052-001) Field devices connect to terminal block (TB1) located on the PEGAsys System’s Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/ TX). unshielded. Total line resistance cannot be greater than 26 Ohms. Battery Enclosure Enclosure Figure 7-10. These 255 addresses can be any mixture of intelligent loop device inputs and outputs without restriction. 33 AH sealed lead-acid batteries used for 24-hour standby operation. Batteries 7-9. The batteries must have terminals that accept standard ring-type solderless connectors. per NFPA and UL requirements. 40 AH. Kidde recommends the use of No. 33 AH (2 sets) (P/N 89-100052-001) Power Sonic 12330. See Appendix H for recommended wiring. Recommended battery manufacturers and models are: Standby Time 24 Hours 60 Hours 90 Hours Battery Panasonic LCR 12 V 17AP. sealed lead-acid batteries. For Power Limited Circuits use Type FPL. See Figure 7-10 for a conduit to CCP example.94“ 10“ 0.2 Refer to Appendix A for required system power calculations. The PC Line is capable of supporting 255 intelligent loop devices on a 2-wire loop. lowcapacitance fire alarm wiring as the connection cable between the RX/TX Module and the field devices. 7-10 FIELD DEVICE CONNECTION TO RX/TX MODULE A separate UL Listed battery enclosure. Route the connection cable to TB1 on the RX/TX PCB and insert the end of each connection cable wire into its proper TB1 slot. and capacitance can not exceed 0.

Optionally. See Figure 7-11 for existing shielded cable termination. the PC line can be installed in a separate conduit as shown previously. Shielded Wire to CCP Note: All new RCUs are shipped from Kidde with their address set to 000. INC. In this style of installation. The unaddressed devices must be connected to the RX/TX Module one at a time in order to address them. N/O CAT. RX/TX PC Line Connections Loop Isolator devices are available to support NFPA-72 Wiring Style 7 and are installed on the PC line of the RX/ TX module. Grounding Nut Shielded Wire TB1 In the Style 6 wiring configurations. If the break is in a single conductor. 6 or 7. TB1 of RX/TX Module Figure 7-12. Isolator packages are available for electrical box mount (Single Gang). 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001 MAX. ASHLAND. do not exceed the SLC resistance and capacitance limitations listed above. Detector Bases TB1 of RX/TX Module Refer to Table 7-1 for a list of the types of allowable configurations that can be selected. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. Addressable Contact Input Device ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED Figure 7-13. NFPA-72 and any applicable local code requirements. 6-inch base mount and an RX/ TX mount. the control panel will register a trouble condition for each device located between the two affected loop isolators.PEGAsys™ In retrofit applications where existing wiring will be used. Style 4 configurations allow T-tapping. TEMP. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: SmartOne TM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enclosure RX/TX Module Figure 7-11. During a short circuit fault condition. each zone is protected from opens and shorts. the RX/TX automatically transmits data and power bi-directionally when a break in the PC line wiring occurs. Figure 7-15 and the RX/TX Module Installation Wiring Diagram in Appendix I depict a typical NFPA Style 7 installation. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. A zone is defined as a group of loop devices. This address is reserved for unregistered devices and cannot be used as a registered address. along with the respective jumper settings for those configurations. the PC line can be configured in Style 4. By "flanking" each group of loop devices with a pair of loop isolators. Otherwise devices may be pre-addressed or multiple pre-addressed loop devices may be connected to the RX/TX PC line at the same time using the hand-held device programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) . As described in this chapter. N/O CAT. NO. if a PC line open trouble is encountered. Addressable Contact Input Device ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) MODEL AI. INSTALL. a short circuit between any two loop isolators will not affect any other zone. all loop devices will remain fully operational. The isolators on each side of the short will open the PC line. T-tapping is only limited by sound installation techniques. INSTALL. use the system reset switch on the display and control board to reset the PC line to normal once the fault is corrected. 400 MAIN ST. ASHLAND. RX/TX PC Line Connections 76-100016-001 7-7 July 2003 . See Figures 7-12 through 7-15. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: SmartOne TM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Detector Bases Note: T-Tap The maximum number of loop devices that can be connected between loop isolators is thirty (30). PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) MODEL AI. All conduit and conductors must meet NEC. For Style 6 PC line connections. TEMP. NO. Style 4. unshielded wire. thus allowing the PC line to use twisted. INC. Style 6. 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001 MAX. 400 MAIN ST.

The SmartOne® smoke detectors (Ionization and Photoelectric) were previously programmed for a device application during the registration process. FPLP or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760. Route the wiring to the terminal block July 2003 1 2 3 4 24V RET 24V RET RX/TX Refer to the SmartOne® Smoke and Heat Detector Installation Sheet (P/N 74-212) for installation instructions. in the event of power failure. EXTERNAL POWER FAILURE INDICATOR CONNECTION Zone 1 Detector Base Loop Isolator Zone 3 Loop Isolator 7-12 TB1 of RX/TX Module Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices between loop isolators. Connect wiring to TB1 on the CCP’s power supply PCB. Loop Isolator Loop Isolator LOOP ISOLATOR Mounted to RX/TX 74-200012-001 The wiring to an external power supply trouble indicating device is to be run through a conduit from the indicating device to the Central Control Panel. Also. Refer to the respective manufacturer’s literature for specific installation instructions of output devices. Style 7. Style 6. 7-13 DETECTOR INSTALLATION Note: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20 ft. as shown in Figure 3-5. of a device with wiring in conduit. refer to Paragraph 2-8. RX/TX PC Line Connection 7-11 OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTION The PEGAsys System provides output signals to drive alarm devices and communicate with central stations and control equipment. Loop Isolator Zone 2 Loop Isolator Instructions for connecting output devices are provided on their respective installation wiring diagrams located in the Appendix I of this manual. The contact can be used to signal an external power supply trouble indicator. RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators Loop Isolator Loop Isolator Loop Isolator • Loop Isolator Zone 2 • Zone 1 See Note Zone 3 The power supply trouble relay is normally powered so that. the relay will transfer to the de-energized state. insert the end of each wire into its proper terminal block slot. and tighten the slot screws firmly. The conduit must be attached to any convenient CCP enclosure knockout. Figure 7-15.6 for setting addresses and registering RCUs.PEGAsys™ located on the respective output module. The wiring must be brought through any convenient Central Control Panel enclosure knockout. All field wiring to output devices is to be run from the output device circuit to the field devices. Note: All Non-Power Limited wiring must be routed away from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of ¼inch. 7-8 76-100016-001 . Troubles include: • • • AC Power Failure 24 Vdc Power Supply Failure Battery Failure Ground Fault Communications Failure Figure 7-14. 7-14 SETTING AND ADJUSTING SMOKE AND HEAT DETECTOR SENSITIVITIES Set the sensitivity of SmartOne® ionization and photoelectric smoke detectors and heat detectors by setting the threshold alarm and pre-alarm smoke density and temperature levels respectively. For Power Limited Circuits use Type FPL. These outputs are provided on the CCM and optional output modules. The PEGAsys System provides a 2 A @ 30 Vdc SPDT relay on the power supply monitor module that de-energizes (normally powered) in the event of a power supply trouble. per NFPA and UL requirements.

(38 mm) deep with a two-gang blank cover. #16 and #18 AWG wire (1. This prompt asks the user for the alarm level for the detector(s) to be set. During the process of configuring. Press the return (↵) key. Type in the Level 2 password. This message verifies that the desired sensitivity adjustments were done on XX number of detectors._ (0. c. Key in the desired pre-alarm level and press the return key.2–3. the system displays: SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY DETECTORS FROM _ _ _ _ TO _ _ _ _ Note: The user would enter the address range of the detectors to be adjusted. There are three applications which represent the majority of detector use: Open Area.0 %/FT 50 ft. 7-15 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE INSTALLATION 2.5–1.5 -3.5–1.5–2.75 mm2 respectively) with size #18 being a minimum requirement. 1. The installation must comply with national and local electrical codes. Key in the desired alarm level and press the return key. (64 mm) deep onegang box. 2. This procedure is selected from the user menus. 7-16 ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE INSTALLATION 4.5 %/FT High Velocity 0.5–3. The AO terminal block 76-100016-001 7-9 July 2003 . SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY PREALARM _. Verify that the display reads: 1:ISOLATE 3:SET 2:LIST 4:TEST 50 ft._ (0. (64 mm) deep onegang box.6 and 2-8. Spacing 80°–155° F 80°–145° F 5. Photo or Heat) within the range. or a standard 4 in.5%/FT 0. It should only be used if there is a need to change the sensitivity of the device. Sensitivity Setting Operation. Smoke and Heat Detector Configuration. The sensitivity for all specified detectors (depending on which type was previously selected) will be as set in this procedure.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure The pre-alarm sensitivity ranges. Also refer to Paragraphs 2-8. After type selection.5. After pressing return the display will read: SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY ALARM _.0 and 0. This prompt asks the user for the pre-alarm level for the detector(s) to be set. by device type.5 %/FT High Velocity 0.7 for setting addresses and other parameters.0/FT) The alarm sensitivity ranges. Select the Detector Sensitivity by typing in 3-3-2. are: Device Ionization Photoelectric Device Thermal Open Area 0.0 %/FT 0.2–2.0 / FT) The Addressable Contact Input Devices are designed to be installed in a North American 2½-in. The AI terminal block will accept #14. 7-14. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: a. Verify that the display reads: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD b.0 %/FT 0. Refer to the wiring the diagram in Appendix I for specific connection information. The range can be from 1 to 255.PEGAsys™ The smoke detectors have specific sensitivities for particular applications. The sensitivity adjustment is accomplished in one of two ways: 1. square box 1½-in. Spacing 70 ft.2 -3. Press the zero (0) key.5%/FT 0. After pressing return the display will read: LEVELS SET ON XX DETECTORS 7. or a standard 4 in.5–1. Verify that the display reads: 1:IONIZATION 3:THERMAL 2:PHOTOELECTRIC (<) to return 3. Open Area (High Air Flow) and Duct. square box 1½ (38 mm) deep with a two-gang blank cover.5–1. by device type. or accepts the default values for the application. This method is generally used for systems which have been installed and operational for a period of time. The system will adjust the sensitivity of all the specified type of detectors which were previously chosen (Ion.0 %/FT The step-by-step procedure to perform the sensitivity adjustment is as follows: 1. Select the desired detector style which is to have its sensitivity adjusted. Spacing 135°–155° F 135°–145° F 6. Spacing 70 ft. are: Device Ionization Photoelectric Device Thermal Open Area 0. Press the return key and the display will read: The Addressable Contact Output Devices are designed to be installed in a North American 2½ in. the operator uses the PCS program and selects the application of the detector and adjusts the settings of the alarm and pre-alarm values within the range for the application.

75 mm2 respectively) with size #18 being a minimum requirement. or P/N 74-100016-001 for a DB25 connector for personal computers). The parameters for and connections to the RS-232 PC port are as follows: Parameters: • • • • Note: 9600 Baud 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity These parameters are fixed and not adjustable. Also refer to Paragraphs 2-8. Refer to Chapter 2 for system operations and programming. RX/TX Module and System Power Supply are secured to the back of the enclosure. 1. For Power Limited Circuits use Type FPL.2 1 2 3 4 5 6 TX Signal Ground RTS CTS N/C RX Connecting a Printer • • • • • The RS-232 printer port of the CCM is a supervised connection. The terminal or computer must be located in the same room as the Central Control Panel. 7-18. CCM is connected to the RX/TX Module. provides easy connection. The following diagram represents the cable. per NFPA and UL requirements. 7-17 Before powering up the PEGAsys for the first time. Paragraph 4-6. are installed in the motherboard. The installation must comply with national and local electrical codes. 3.PEGAsys™ will accept #14. located on the CCM. Optional motherboard. INSTALLATION CHECKOUT the type required by the terminal device.7 for setting addresses and other parameters. The installer must enable the printer port for operation. if installed. FPLP or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760. A connection cable is all that is needed to connect a serial printer to the RS-232 printer port of the CCM.0 and 0. PRINTER RX (receive data) Sig. The enabling or disabling of the printer port would be done by accessing the first or second level menu. addressed correctly. #16 and #18 AWG wire (1. The connector at the terminal end must be of July 2003 7-10 PRINT PORT Figure 7-16. if used. CCM Printer Port 76-100016-001 . configured for appropriate mode of operation and their external wiring is connected correctly. Note: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of ¼inch. CONNECTION OF PERIPHERALS Pin and Function: • • • • • • 7-18. RTS CTS* N/C RX PIN 1. The terminal or computer connection cable must have an RJ-12 type modular phone plug that connects to the CCM (use P/N 74-100016-003. JK2 Pin 6 Pin 1 A UL Listed EDP terminal or computer can be connected to the system RS-232 port. ensure that the following has been completed: • Central Control Module (CCM). 4. CCM TX Sig. DTR* • • 7-18 The following paragraphs will describe how to connect a terminal or personal computer and a printer. 5. Gnd. Gnd. Perform the Power-Up procedure in Chapter 4. System Power Supply (communications bus and 24 Vdc) and Remote RS-485 peripheral(s) if any. CCM configuration jumpers configured correctly to ensure proper operation of the programmable (signal/ release) output (MP1).1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer * Note: +8 to +12 Vdc signal needed for supervision if using a graphic annunciator.6 and 2-8.5. Output modules. A 6-wire RJ-12 type modular phone jack (PC port). for a DB9 connector for laptops. See Appendix I for specific connection information. RX/TX Module is connected to the CCM (RJ-12) and system power supply (24 Vdc). Route the connection cable to the RS-232 modular plug labelled PC port jack until it snaps into place. is connected to the CCM (communications bus) and system power supply (24 Vdc). 6. Display Assembly. 2.

which must be labeled FIRE ALARM. Over-current protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electric Code. as well as applicable local codes. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises.9 Auxiliary Power Supply ( ) X 1.9 = 1.) 76-100016-001 A-1 July 2003 .9 Sum column for AC Branch Current required = = Amps Note: Each additional main power supply and auxiliary power supply added to the system would increase the AC requirement by 1. When multiple power supplies are installed in the system enclosure(s) they must all be fed from the same circuit.95 Auxiliary Power Supply ( ) X 0.) Table A-2. without any Table A-1. No other equipment may be powered from the fire-alarm branch circuit. The PEGAsys™ fire alarm/suppression control system requires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch circuit (120 or 240 Vac). AC Branch Circuit Requirements (120 Vac) Number of Devices 1 X Device Type Current Draw (Amps) Total Current per Device Control Panel 1. NFPA-72.95 Amps (max.95 Sum column for AC Branch Current required = = Amps Note: Each additional main power supply and auxiliary power supply added to the system would increase the AC requirement by 0.9 Amps (max. AC Branch Circuit Requirements (220 Vac) Number of Devices 1 X Device Type Current Draw (Amps) Total Current per Device Control Panel 0.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX A POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS A-1 AC BRANCH CIRCUIT disconnect devices. Use a minimum of # 14 AWG with 600-V insulation for this branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously. from the power source to the fire alarm/ suppression control panel.95 = 0.

000310 0.035 0. Table A-3.030 0.PEGAsys™ Note: A-2 SYSTEM STANDBY POWER REQUIREMENTS Use Table A-3 (standby or non-alarm) to determine main system power supply and any installed auxiliary power module standby current requirements. Auxiliary Outputs must be considered for total standby alarm loading of the system power supply. and standby battery charging.035 0.070 0.070 Note: 1. each supply must be evaluated for its loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.025 0.5A (See Notes 1 and 2) Auxi li ary Output 2. Max 1. The power for operating external devices is expandable.065 S tan d b y C u rren t (Am p s ) 0. Standby Power Requirements (24 Vdc) Mo d u le/D evice Central Control Module RXTX module Power supply Moni tor Auxi li ary Output 1. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets. The control panel provides regulated power for operating external devices.001 X X X X X Sum Column for Standby Load (Notes 2) = = = = = = Amps 0. system operation. 2.000330 0.010 0.5A (See Notes 1 and 2) Multi -Loop Mother Board Si gnal Audi ble Output Module Relay Output Module Ci ty Ti e Output Module Agent Release Output Module F IE L D D E V IC E S Ioni zati on Detector Photoelectri c Detector Addressable Contact Input Addressable Contact Output Loop Isolators 0.000405 0. July 2003 A-2 76-100016-001 .060 X X X X X X X X X X Mo d u le/S ystem 1 = = = = = = = = = = Maximu m S tan d b y C u rren t (Amp s) 0. Max 1.000400 0. Use of auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs of during standby operation must not cause the calculated standby current of the system to exceed its rated maximum as defined in the Table A-6.

Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use. 5.5A (See Note 2) Auxiliary Output 2.060 Alarm Current (Amps) 0. 3.000400 0. each supply must be evaluated for its own loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.035 0.5A (See Note 2) Multi-Loop Mother Board Signal Audible Output Module Signal Module Outputs (See Note 3) Relay Output Module City Tie Output Module Agent Release Output Module Agent Release Module Signal Circuit (See Note 5) Agent Release Module Signal Circuits (Note 4) FIELD DEVICES Ionization Detector Photoelectric Detector Addressable Contact Input Addressable Zone Monitor Addressable Contact Output Loop Isolators (Active) PALM for use with ORION XT HSSD 0. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use. Max 1.007 0. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets. which must be evaluated for loading.150 . Momentary solenoids are negligible in their current draws and should not be added into the calculation.135 0.000440 0. CCM Alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling devices.PEGAsys™ A-3 Note: SYSTEM ALARM POWER REQUIREMENTS Use Table A-4 (Alarm ) to determine alarm current requirements for main system power supply and auxiliary power supply combination (if used). the current draw of the solenoid must be added in the calculation. Table A-4. Auxiliary Outputs would have to be considered for total alarm loading of the system power supply. Each signal circuit will provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use. 4.000350 0.035 0.210 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X = = = = = = = = = = = = Module/System 1 = Maximum Alarm Current (Amps) 0.080 0.210 Note: 1. Max 1. Each agent release module contains three signaling circuits per module. With constant power solenoids. Each signal output module's alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling devices.075 0.050 X X X X X X X Sum Column for Alarm Load = = = = = = = = Amps 0.000380 0. 2. 76-100016-001 A-3 July 2003 . There are a total of four (4) signal circuits per module. Alarm Power Requirements (24 Vdc) Module/Device Central Control Module CCM MP01 and MP02 Output (See Note 1) RXTX Module Power Supply Monitor Auxiliary Output 1.000445 0.

60 or 90) hours ( ) Required Alarm Time (5 min. NFPA 72–2002 allows four hours of standby battery capacity if there is an automatic starting engine driven generator. which is 12 to 99 AH. NFPA 2001 requires 24 hours of standby and five minutes of alarm activation.084) (10 Min.1 Total AH Required (Original AH required + Derating Factor) = X = = = = Note: 1. July 2003 A-4 76-100016-001 . 5. if used. complete Table A-5 to determine the total battery (AH) capacity necessary for the power supply.167) ( ) Total Amp Hours Required (Sum of above) (Derating Factor) X 0. needed to support the control panel. 2. enter 0. 6. Main system enclosure can house up to two (2) 33 AH batteries (P/N 89-100052-001). NFPA 72–2002 Protected Premises or Proprietary fire alarm systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by five minutes alarm activation. Using the totals from Table A-3 and Table A-4. If an auxiliary power module is added to the system the batteries must be moved to a separate battery box or secondary enclosure. Factory Mutual requires Pre-action and Deluge systems to have 90 hours of battery standby and 10 minutes of alarm activation. in amp hours (AH). NFPA 72–2002 Auxiliary or Remote Station requires 24 hours of standby power followed by five minutes alarm activation. There is a maximum battery size which the system power supply (P/N 76-100009-010) is capable of charging. enter 0. 4. Table A-5: Total Battery Capacity Required Total Standby Load (From Table A-3) ( ) Total Alarm Load (From Table A-4) ( ) X Required Standby Time (4. Select batteries which meet or exceed the total amp hours (AH) calculated and are within the acceptable range of the system battery charger output.PEGAsys™ A-4 CALCULATING BATTERY SIZE REQUIRED Table A-5 sums the standby and alarm loads to arrive at the battery size. 3. 24.

9 Amps 76-100016-001 A-5 July 2003 . This system current calculation is for a 120 Vac main feed.5 A. Refer to Paragraph A-1 for additional information. Table A-7.2 Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply 0.9 1.9 Control Panel Auxiliary Power Supply 0 X 1.9 = Total Current per Device 1.9 Sum column for AC Branch Current required = 0 = 1. refer to Table A-6 for details concerning battery capacities and charging capabilities. AC Branch Current Calculation Example Device Type Number of Devices 1 X Current Draw (Amps) 1. Table A-6. Battery Capacities B attery (B acku p H o u rs) 12 AH (4 hours) 17 AH (4 hours) 33 AH (4 hours) 33 AH (24 hours) 160 AH (24 hours) 66 AH (24 hours) 99 AH (60 hours) 99 AH (60 hours) 160 AH (90 hours) Maximu m Availab le S tan d b y C u rren t Am p s (F o r On e P o w er S u p p ly) 2.0 7. with signal appliances totaling .5 3.2 This example is based on the system specified in the previous paragraph.1 Power Requirement Example • • • • • The following power calculations will be based on a the system configuration listed below: Central Control Panel (CCP) with Field Devices: • • • • • • • • Central Control Module Ten (10) Ionization Detectors Two (2) RX/TX Modules Twenty (20) Photoelectric Detectors One (1) Power Supply Module Ten (10) Heat Detectors One (1) Multi-Loop Motherboard Six (6) Addressable Contact Input Devices Two (2) Signal Output Modules. AC Branch Current Calculation Example A-5. has a momentary control head on the releasing circuit and signaling appliances totalling 0.PEGAsys™ A-5 POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY CAPACITY The system is capable of charging batteries of various capacities up to 99 AH.800A on each Four (4) Addressable Contact Output Devices One (1) Signaling Device. connected to MP1 of the CCM One (1) Output Relay Module One (1) Agent Release Output Module.1 Maximu m Availab le S tan d b y C u rren t Am p s (F o r Tw o P o w er S u p p ly) A-5.9 Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply 1.6 6.4 0.6 N/A 1.

Standby or Non-Alarm Power Requirement Calculation Module/Device Central Control Module RX/TX module Power supply Monitor Auxiliary Output 1.010 0. Refer to Paragraph A-2 for additional information.004 0.030 0.5A Multi-Loop Mother Board Signal Audible Output Module Relay Output Module City Tie Output Module Agent Release Output Module FIELD DEVICES Ionization Detector Photoelectric Detector Heat Detector Addressable Contact Input Addressable Contact Output Loop Isolators 0.000400 0.025 0.060 July 2003 A-6 76-100016-001 . Max 1.035 0.PEGAsys™ A-5. Table A-8.008 0.070 0.035 0.065 0.5A Auxiliary Output 2.380 Amps = = 0.001 X X X Sum Column for Standby Load X X 10 20 10 6 4 = = = = 0.050 0.065 Standby Current (Amps) 0.035 0.0016 0.000400 0.0024 0.010 Maximum Standby Current (Amps) 0.000330 0.000310 0.070 0.004 0.000400 0.3 Main Power Supply Loading Examples This example is based on the same system as above.070 0. Max 1.060 X X X X X X X X X X 1 1 2 1 Module/System 1 2 1 = = = = = = = = = = 0.

070 0.800 0.035 0.292 Amp s 0.0088 0.800 0.150 0 Usi ng momentary devi ce .000440 0.210 0.500 0.270 0.210 0. Max 1.0044 0.075 Maximu m Alarm C u rren t (Amp s) 0.100 0.150 0 0.060 0 0 0.080 0.PEGAsys™ Table A-9.135 0.035 0.0026 0.007 Alarm C u rren t (Amp s) 0.5A Auxi li ary Output 2.000380 0.000445 0. Max 1.075 0.5A Multi -Loop Mother Board Si gnal Audi ble Output Module Si gnal Module Outputs Relay Output Module Ci ty Ti e Output Module Agent Release Module Agent Release Output Ci rcui ts Agent Release Module Si gnal Ci rcui t F IE L D D E V IC E S Ioni zati on Detector Photoelectri c Detector Heat Detector Addressable Contact Input Addressable Contact Output Loop Isolators (Acti ve) 0.0044 0.500 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Sum Column for Alarm Load 10 20 10 6 4 1 1 1 1 2 total 1 Mo d u le/S ystem 1 1 2 1 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 2.000400 0.000440 0.060 76-100016-001 A-7 July 2003 .100 0. Alarm Power Requirement Calculation Mo d u le/D evice Central Control Module CCM MP01 and MP02 Output RX/TX Module Power Supply Moni tor Auxi li ary Output 1.035 0.0018 0.

4 Battery Size Requirement Calculation Example This example is based on the same system as above. System Power Requirements when in Alarm is 2. Table A-10.12 X = 0.292 Amps.1925 = 9. 24.1 Total AH Required (Original total AH required + Derating Factor) X = 9. Battery Size Requirement is 10. Battery Size Requirement Calculation Total from Standby Power Requirement Calculation (0.9312 = 10. enter 0.380) Total from Alarm Power Requirement Calculation (2.084) Total of both sums equals Amp Hours Required (Sum of Above) (Derating factor) X 0.084) (10 Min. 60 or 90) hours (24) Required Alarm Time (5 min.312 0.PEGAsys™ A-5.167) (0. enter 0. July 2003 A-8 76-100016-001 .380 Amps.241 AH. System Power Requirement when in Standby is 0.292) Required Standby Time (4.24 Example Results: The results of the prior calculations are as follows: • • • • Current requirement of the 120 Vac Main Feed is 1. Select 12 AH batteries. Refer to Paragraph A-4 for additional information.9 Amps.

76-100016-001 B-1 24V 24V SYSTEM POWER The PEGAsys system is capable of substantial expansion in the number of RX/TX loops. The unit would be installed if the system required more than the base system's 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power. The multi-loop motherboard has the ability to connect up to eight (8) RX/TX loop controllers. The cabinet is a UL Listed battery enclosure for use with the PEGAsys. AC OUT 1 2 L N R MOTHER BD CCM RET 24V R RET 24V RET RET RET Figure B-1 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system (P/N 76-100000-501). Single Loop with Motherboard Figure B-3 shows the PEGAsys system with an auxiliary power module (P/N 76-100009-002) installed. The auxiliary power supply module provides an additional 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power for a total of 8 Amps for system use. the system batteries are moved to a battery cabinet (P/N 76-100010-001). Figure B-3 could also be a multi-loop system with the inclusion of the multi-loop motherboard and additional RX/TX loop controllers. The system will support up to sixteen (16) output modules for a single-loop system and twentythree (23) output modules for a multi-loop system. Power Supply/Charger assembly and the system enclosure. N L G N L SHR RET AC IN DC IN 1 24V TB9 DS1 SHR 24V RET RET TBL RELAY C NC W1 TB8 NO ASHLAND. The system power supply monitor module can supervise two (2) power supply units (4 Amps each for a total of eight [8] Amps per module). The basic system can be expanded as shown in the following paragraphs. The following diagrams will demonstrate the available ways of expanding the system. MA 01721 SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY W2 W3 SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SILENCE SCROLL RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. output modules and system output power. INC. Single Loop Figure B-2 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system with the optional output motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001) installed. The output motherboard provides the system with mechanical and electrical interfaces for up to eight (8) output modules of any style. with a maximum of eight (8) of any one type of module. When the auxiliary module is installed. Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) module. To install the output modules. Figure B-1. INC. AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET TP4 S1 W4 S2 A B 24V 2 1 2 1 Kidde TP3 S3 + - BAT F1 DC IN 2 July 2003 . This includes the Central Control Module (CCM). AC OUT 1 2 L N 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 N L G N L SHR RET AC IN DC IN 1 24V TB9 DS1 SHR 24V RET RET TBL RELAY C NC W1 TB8 NO ASHLAND. which allows for up to 64 Amps of 24 Vdc power. for a maximum of 2040 intelligent addressable points per system. MA 01721 SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY W2 W3 SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SILENCE SCROLL RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. insert them into the desired motherboard slot and fasten to the metal bracket with the two (2) provided screws. AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET TP4 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1 R MOTHER BD CCM RET 24V R RET 24V RET RET RET 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 24V 24V SYSTEM POWER Kidde TP3 S3 + - 24V BAT F1 DC IN 2 Figure B-2.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX B SYSTEM EXPANSION B-1 INTRODUCTION The PEGAsys ML (multi-loop) system (P/N 76-100000-600) looks much the same as the system in Figure B-2 with the exception of the multi-loop motherboard (P/N 76-100017001) in the place of the basic motherboard (P/N 76-100007001).

ASHLAND. Only one of the three bus communication components (i. The hardwire option allows the system installer to provide individual modules with their own power source. System with Auxiliary Power Supply Module Figure B-4 shows an expanded single-loop PEGAsys system which contains two (2) motherboard assemblies. power supply monitor modules July 2003 B-2 Figure B-4.e. INC. The main power supply and motherboard in the first enclosure must be configured for in-line RS-485 bus supervision by removing jumpers W4 and JP1. MA 01721 RET DC IN 1 W2 W3 SHR RET 24V RET AUX 1 AUX 2 SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY R R TP4 24V SILENCE SCROLL RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL.PEGAsys™ and motherboard) in the expansion enclosure can have its terminating jumper installed. 76-100016-001 . three (3) complete power supply assemblies (24 Amps of 24 Vdc power) and up to sixteen (16) total possible output modules. INC. This connection allows complete supervision by the CCM in the main enclosure of all output modules installed on the second motherboard. This DC power is hardwired into signal and release modules whose loading would otherwise cause more than 8 Amps of 24 Vdc current to be drawn from the motherboard during activation. the installer would use a two-conductor cable to connect the communications bus from the motherboard assembly to the power supply. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY 06-129562-001 NO NC C A B TB9 DS1 SHR 24V RET RET DC IN 2 W4 TBL RELAY TB8 NO C NC N DS1 AC OUT 1 2 S1 S2 2 1 L N L 2 1 G AC IN N L W1 F1 24V S3 ASHLAND. AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET TP3 S3 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1 + - BAT W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR + - RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V BAT DC IN 2 R MOTHER BD CCM SYSTEM POWER Kidde 24V RET 24V MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. INC. INC. Note: One main power supply/charger assembly can be used to charge a common set of batteries. Expanded Single Loop System Figure B-5 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which is capable of having eight (8) output modules of various types and a maximum of 24 Vdc power at 40 Amps. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY 06-129562-001 NO NC C A B R RET 24V RET W4 DS1 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 N AC OUT 1 2 AC IN L N N L G RET RET 24V 24V L 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 S3 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET DC IN 1 AUX 1 AUX 2 R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V + BAT DC IN 2 Figure B-3. Auxiliary power supplies within the expansion enclosure can share a set of batteries. Refer to the particular module installation diagram in Chapter 7 and Appendix A for power-supply expansion guidelines. or they can individually support their own set of batteries. All other power supply/charger assemblies can be connected to the common set of batteries in parallel for backup DC power only. In the above example. Be careful not to exceed the maximum charging capacity of the main power supply. The second power supply could then be daisy-chained to the first to complete the communications connections. The other two must be configured for inline RS-485 bus supervision. ASHLAND.. The charging circuit on the additional power supply/charger assemblies will have to be disabled by removing jumper W1. N L N L G N L N L N L G N L SHR RET 24V AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 TB9 DS1 SHR 24V RET RET TBL RELAY C NC W1 TB8 NO ASHLAND. AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET TP4 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1 24V R MOTHER BD CCM RET 24V R RET 24V RET RET RET 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 24V 24V SYSTEM POWER Kidde TP3 S3 + - BAT F1 DC IN 2 SHR RET 24V AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. The 24 Vdc power for the motherboard (in the expansion enclosure) is derived from one of the power supply assemblies installed within that enclosure and is connected by a two-wire connection. MA 01721 SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY W2 W3 SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SILENCE SCROLL RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. respectively. The power supplies need to be tied to the communications bus for supervision purposes. The communications bus interconnections between the two motherboards are made by using six (6) conductors from the bus terminal block on the motherboard in the main enclosure to connect to the same terminal block on the motherboard in the expansion enclosure.

ASHLAND. INC. INC. A W4 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 S3 B + BAT DC IN 2 ASHLAND. INC. INC. INC. 06-129562-001 NO NC C A B TBL RELAY DC IN 2 W4 DS1 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 N AC OUT 1 2 AC IN L N L G N W1 F1 L S3 DC IN 1 ASHLAND. MA 01721 R W2 W3 TBL RELAY RET 24V RET 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 S3 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 SYSTEM POWER BAT DC IN 2 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. A B 24V + BAT DC IN 2 ASHLAND. Figure B-7 shows an expanded PEGAsys ML system which could have up to eight (8) RX/TX loop controllers and nine (9) output modules installed in the two motherboards. ASHLAND. SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SILENCE SCROLL BAT AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET TP3 S3 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1 + - W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 SYSTEM POWER BAT DC IN 2 R MOTHER BD CCM RET 24V SYSTEM POWER Kidde 24V MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. INC. Expanded System for up to 16 Output Modules and 7 Primary/Auxiliary Power Supplies 76-100016-001 B-3 July 2003 AUX 1 AUX 2 SHR RET 24V RET AUX 1 AUX 2 R R 24V R R W1 TB8 TB9 24V W1 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V RET 24V RET 24V TB8 TB9 + BAT SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR MOTHER BD CCM RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. The system also has a maximum 24 Vdc power of 24 Amps. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A for more details on power expansion. one of the four power supplies charges the batteries. Each power supply must have two of its own conductors connected directly to the battery set to meet code requirements. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY 06-129562-001 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY TB9 DS1 SHR 24V RET RET TB8 NO C NC 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY 24V RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. and all four receive standby power from the batteries. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A for power supply expansion guidelines. Figure B-6 also displays the flexibility to bring all four power supply assemblies in the second expansion enclosure to one set of batteries. MA 01721 RET DC IN 1 24V S3 DC IN 1 W2 W3 SHR RET 24V RET RET AUX 1 AUX 2 SHR RET 24V RET AUX 1 AUX 2 SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY R R TP4 24V R R AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SILENCE SCROLL RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 SYSTEM POWER BAT DC IN 2 Figure B-6 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which could have sixteen (16) output modules and 56 Amps of 24 Vdc power. ASHLAND. MA 01721 NO NC R W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C 06-129562-001 C A B RET 24V RET W4 DS1 S2 2 1 S1 2 1 N AC OUT 1 2 AC IN W4 L N N N DS1 AC OUT 1 2 S1 S2 L L G N L 2 1 2 1 RET RET G 24V 24V AC IN L N 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 S3 24V L RET SHR RET 24V RET DC IN 1 24V S3 RET DC IN 1 Figure B-6. ASHLAND. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 SYSTEM POWER BAT DC IN 2 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C 06-129562-001 NO NC C A B TB9 DS1 SHR 24V RET RET DC IN 2 W4 TBL RELAY TB8 NO C NC N W4 DS1 AC OUT 1 2 S1 S2 2 1 N DS1 L N AC OUT 1 2 S1 S2 L N L L 2 1 G AC IN 2 1 2 1 G N L AC IN N W1 F1 L 24V S3 ASHLAND. INC.PEGAsys™ N L N L G N L SHR RET 24V AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. A B ASHLAND. INC. The three non-charging power supplies must have Jumper W1 removed to disable their charging circuits. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY 06-129562-001 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. INC. INC. Expanded System for up to 8 Output Modules and 5 Primary/Auxiliary Power Supplies N L N L G N L AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 R RET RET RET 24V 24V 24V RET 24V 24V 24V R RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V + - NO NC C A W4 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 S3 B N DS1 AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N L G N L R RET R RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V + - NO NC C A W4 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 S3 B N DS1 AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N L G N L R RET R RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V + - SHR RET 24V AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C 06-129562-001 RET 24V RET W4 DS1 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 S3 24V RET SHR N AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N N L L G AUX 1 AUX 2 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR MOTHER BD CCM RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. MA 01721 W2 W3 AUX 1 AUX 2 TP4 R RET 24V RET 24V R RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V + - 06-129562-001 NO NC C A W4 S1 S2 2 1 2 1 B N DS1 AC OUT 1 2 L N L RET RET G 24V 24V AC IN DC IN 1 N L Figure B-5. In this arrangement. A B ASHLAND. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY NO NC C N DS1 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET AC OUT 1 2 AC IN DC IN 1 L N N L L G R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V + BAT DC IN 2 . ASHLAND. as shown in the diagram. INC. SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET TP3 S3 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1 + - BAT W1 TB8 TB9 24V W1 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR RET 24V RET 24V RET 24V TB8 TB9 + BAT SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V + BAT DC IN 2 R MOTHER BD CCM SYSTEM POWER Kidde 24V RET 24V MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. INC. ASHLAND.

Expanded ML System for 8 RX/TX and 9 Output Modules AUX 1 AUX 2 R R 24V W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V + BAT DC IN 2 July 2003 B-4 76-100016-001 . MA 01721 RET DC IN 1 W2 W3 SHR RET 24V RET AUX 1 AUX 2 SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY R R TP4 24V PRE-ALARM SILENCE SYSTEM RESET TP3 ALARM SUPERVISORY RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. BAT AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SILENCE SCROLL S3 S1 W4 S2 A B 2 1 2 1 + - W1 TB8 TB9 TP3 TP4 F1 RET RET 24V SHR RET SYSTEM POWER 24V RET 24V RET 24V + BAT DC IN 2 R MOTHER BD CCM SYSTEM POWER Kidde 24V RET 24V MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. ASHLAND. INC. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY 06-129562-001 NO NC C B A R RET 24V RET W4 DS1 S2 2 1 S1 2 1 N AC OUT 1 2 AC IN L N N L G RET RET 24V 24V L 06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2 S3 24V RET SHR RET 24V RET DC IN 1 Figure B-7. ASHLAND. INC.PEGAsys™ AC OUT 1 2 L N N L G N L SHR RET AC IN DC IN 1 24V MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL. MA 01721 W2 W3 TBL RELAY 06-129562-001 NO NC C B A TB9 DS1 SHR 24V RET RET DC IN 2 W4 TBL RELAY TB8 NO C NC N DS1 AC OUT 1 2 S2 2 1 S1 2 1 L N N L L G AC IN W1 F1 24V S3 ASHLAND. INC.

Once the delay timer has started. once an alarm exists. changes the delay timer to the selected delay. C-4 DELAY The time-delay period is an installer programmable value which begins to count down after the automatic release criterion has be attained for a particular protected area. The time-delay can be programmed for activation after one or two alarm occurrences. C-5 SOAK The PEGAsys system can support up to nine (9) independently controlled releasing outputs (AR1-AR8 and MP1). Release of the abort switch continues the countdown from the initial value. Upon release of abort switch. compatible actuating and initiating devices. For complete details. The PEGAsys supports four styles of aborts. as listed in Table C-1. Functions in similar manner to the UL-type abort.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX C RELEASING APPLICATIONS C-1 INTRODUCTION which is optionally programmable to be a signal release output. The abort input is not intended to be used for a service disconnect. Abort Styles Abort Type Underwriter Laboratories (UL)(Complies with UL 864) Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI) (Non-UL) New York City (Non-UL) Local Jurisdiction (Non-UL) Description Delay timer continues to count down upon abort activation. The following features are supported for releasing functions. which are used to control releasing functions. plus an additional 90 seconds. Note: The abort function will not work if a time delay value is not entered in the EOC programming for the protected area. preaction sprinkler and deluge sprinkler control applications. MP1 is the CCM releasing output The soak function is used to automatically shut off the releasing solenoid at a pre-determined time after the mapped inputs activate it. AR1-AR8 are the agent release I/O modules which are inserted into the I/O motherboard. The timer will not start as long as the abort switch is held. This soak function is for use in NFPA 16 applications only. the PEGAsys system meets the requirements of the following standards: NFPA 12 NFPA 12A NFPA 13 NFPA 15 NFPA 16 NFPA 17 NFPA 17A NFPA 2001 C-2 CO2 Extinguishing Systems (High Pressure) HALON 1301 Extinguishing Systems Sprinkler Systems Water Spray Systems Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-Water Spray Systems Dry-Chemical Extinguishing Systems Wet-Chemical Extinguishing Systems Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems PROGRAMMING The abort function is a feature which manually stops a discharge time delay. C-1 July 2003 76-100016-001 . plus the 90 seconds additional delay. Maximum allowable delay is 60 seconds as allowed by UL 864. refer to the PCS manual. Release of the abort switch continues the countdown. When used with UL Listed. It may be programmed as a 10-minute or 15-minute soak period. and stops at 10 second mark until release of abort switch. Table C-1. timer resumes the countdown starting at 10 seconds. with the only exception that the abort will only function if held prior to the receipt of the second alarm. including releasing. The PCS program is used to program the system for all functions. C-3 ABORT The PEGAsys system can be used for agent release. Operation of the abort switch. The delay timer will not start as long as the abort switch is held. operation of the abort switch restores the timer to its original value.

MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: SmartOne TM . Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection with Abort Switch Note: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the abort station contacts for supervision. The addressable contact monitor is connected to a Listed manual release station such as the Kidde Suppression Agent Release switch (P/N 84-100007-00X). Figure C-1 shows the interconnection of the addressable contact monitor and the abort station switch.PEGAsys™ (+) PC Line (-) In (+) (-) PC Line Out PUSH / HOLD Remote LED (Optional) 10K ohms P/N 06-129025-003 ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED MODEL AI. as explained in Table C-1. 400 MAIN ST. ASHLAND. TEMP. Addressable Contact Monitor P/N 70-407008-001 Note: Figure C-2. C-2 76-100016-001 July 2003 PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) 1 PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 P/N 87875201 tem Abort switch (P/N 87875201). INC. The addressable contact monitor is connected to a Listed abort station. 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001 MAX. INSTALL. N/O CAT. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. INSTALL. Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that contact monitor. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that monitor. NO. NO. such as the Kidde Suppression Sys- (+) PC Line (-) In Remote LED (Optional) ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED MODEL AI. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: SmartOne TM . Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection with Manual Release Switch The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the manual pull station contacts for supervision. C-6. These devices are: C-6.1 Abort Switch The abort switch is connected to an addressable contact monitor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an abort input with a selected abort style. ASHLAND. 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001 MAX. Figure C-2 shows the interconnection of the addressable contact monitor and the manual release switch. TEMP. 400 MAIN ST. N/O CAT. SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT Addressable Contact Monitor P/N 70-407008-001 Figure C-1. (+) (-) PC Line Out FIRE ALARM FIRE ALARM 10K ohms P/N 06-129025-003 PUSH PULL R P/N 84-100007-00X . INC.2 Manual Release Switch The manual release switch is an addressable contact monitor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as a manual release input. C-6 SPECIAL MODULE TYPES The PEGAsys provides specific styles of devices which have special releasing functions.

See Appendix I and the PCS User's Manual for details on the configuration of this output. pump running. All wiring from the agent release module to the release device is fully supervised. Wiring Basics 76-100016-001 C-3 July 2003 . as required. sounder 1 "A" leg).2 Release Module Output Wiring The agent release module that the PEGAsys system uses to provide the release function offers one release output capable of powering two solenoids simultaneously. water level (tank). Inputs could be air pressure.PEGAsys™ C-7 C-7. Wiring Basics C-7. that is defaulted as a release output. The PEGAsys system can be used to activate and supervise pre-action sprinkler and deluge sprinkler systems for protection of facilities. Refer to Appendix I and the PCS User's Manual for details on configuration of the release outputs. An example of the releasing circuit wiring is provided in Figure C-4. Terminal TB4. including the actual device in the circuit. along with all other system parameters. Refer to Chapter 2 for details on programming the addressable input device for various reporting styles. For a list of Approved devices. For sprinkler applications the addressable input module (P/N 70-407008-00x) can be used to monitor and supervise any of the following sprinkler type inputs. An example of the CCM releasing circuit wiring is shown in Figure C-3. For wiring details. refer to Table 3-2 in this manual. The CCM output (MP1) and agent release output modules (AR1-AR8) can be programmed for use with most popular sprinkler solenoids. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Single Solenoid 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Two Solenoid Figure C-4. For all wiring detail. Release Module.1 AGENT RELEASE APPLICATIONS CCM Release Output Wiring C-8 PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS The PEGAsys system provides one output on the CCM (MP01. waterflow. CCM Release Output. etc. see the CCM wiring diagram in Appendix I. for each particular application. see Appendix I. SOUNDER 1 REP 1 A B Figure C-3.

July 2003 C-4 76-100016-001 .PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

76-100016-001 D-1 July 2003 .PEGAsys™ APPENDIX D Space Reserved for Future Use.

PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. July 2003 D-2 76-100016-001 .

See Appendix I for complete RX/TX PC line wiring instructions. Refer to Appendix A. spacings. Agent release output can be CCM output MP1 or agent release module AR1-AR8. The solenoid output on-time period should be set to either “90 seconds” or “on until reset” using the PCS program. The pre-alarm and alarm setpoint ranges are as follows: Pre-Alarm–80° to 155° F Alarm–135° to 155° F Initiating Circuits (RX/TX-PC line) must be configured for Style 6 wiring.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX E FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS FOR PRE-ACTION AND DELUGE TYPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS E-1 GENERAL INFORMATION PEGAsys™ system installation applications that require Factory Mutual (FM) Approval of pre-action and deluge sprinkler systems must conform to the following guidelines: • SmartOne® Thermal Detectors. Each output is required to be configured for solenoid activation. when used. Model THD-7252. Provide 90 hours of standby battery and 10 minutes of alarm operation. • • • 76-100016-001 E-1 July 2003 . must be installed at 20 ft.

July 2003 E-2 76-100016-001 .PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

releasing solenoids or other devices specified in the system's operational requirements. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX). This module is the heart of the system. Typical output modules are Relay. For example. Line or circuit interconnecting several devices from a central point. Signal Audible and Agent Release. etc. It contains the main Central Processing Unit. The display assembly includes: an indicating 80 character alphanumeric display. that has the capacity for eight output modules. Computing power is distributed to the actual real world device. The CPU in photoelectric or ionization detectors measures and stores its detection smoke chamber value 256 times per day. The EOC programming allows combining of inputs to obtain the desired outputs. The use of one trunk or pair of wires to communicate with one or more devices. 1001 + 1004= I001). A device with the capability to automatically communicate its location and state via a multiplex trunk to a Central Control Panel. This reduces the communication burden on the loop. Programmable Memory. An assembly of conventional circuits. Conforms to NFPA Style 7. All Alarm and Prealarm decisions are made at the device level. The sum of the scrolling 30 days is used to establish a reference point for smoke detection under the unique environmental conditions that the detector experiences. An enclosure that houses Central Control Module(CCM). contact-type initiating device. and indicating LEDs to display system status. Two device types are available: Normally Open and Normally Closed. Display Assembly.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX F GLOSSARY Address Addressable Device Addressable Contact Device (ACID) AdministrativeTask AlarmVerification Analog Analog Input Device Central Control Panel Central Control Module (CCM) Digital Device Distributed Intelligence A four digit code indicating the sequence or device number of a smart device. %/ft. The PEGAsys allows 255 devices to communicate on one trunk. Reports. to activate notification appliances. 1st digit is the RX/TX loop number and the remaining three digits are the device number. two programmable signal outputs and three Form C relays. The EOC language is flexible to suit most any fire alarm/suppression application. An optional assembly. to describe a physical quantity such as voltage. Pertaining to representation by means of a continuous variable and physical quantity. A device which provides protection against wire to wire short conditions on the RX/TX PC line. The daily average is stored in a scrolling fashion adding the final day’s average and dropping the average that is 30 days old. This feature reduces false alarms from environmental influences without reducing sensitivity. A pre programmed time delay which causes the system to wait for a confirmation signal during the delay period before activating the pre programmed alarm outputs. optional Motherboard and Output Modules. The values that are stored reflect the unique environmental condition that the detector experiences in daily operation. See Smart Device. A daisy-chained SLC. Power Supply. located in the Central Control Panel enclosure. such as a Contact Input or Relay Output RCUs. Drift Compensation Display Assembly Event Output Control (EOC) Internal Identifier (I001–I255) Motherboard Loop Loop Isolators Multi drop Line Multiplex (Per NFPA-72) Output Module 76-100016-001 F-1 July 2003 . Typical modules are Relay and Signal Audible. located in the Central Control Panel. A device with two discrete states. The CPU averages each day’s values and stores the daily average for 30 days. push button switches to control the system. Meets the NFPA 72–2002 definition. Watch Dog Timer. thus providing greater immunity to EMI and RFI. lists.. Symbols that are used to name or identify a combination of inputs (for example.0. Real-Time Clock. two RS-232C serial ports. The PEGAsys display assembly is mounted on the CCM and it communicates with the Central Control Module. status and other housekeeping functions of the Central Control Panel. Monitor module that interfaces with an unpowered.

A maximum of eight (8) modules with thirty-two (32) circuits may be installed in the PEGAsys system. Manual Release. 24 V. An output module. WaterFlow. A message on LCD display that identifies the type of device reporting. July 2003 F-2 76-100016-001 . An Output Module located in the Central Control Panel enclosure that interfaces with auxiliary equipment. that provides two Class A. Supervisory and Normal. Power and communication wires originating from the RX/TX Module. If the CPU is operating normally. Style Y . Examples would be photoelectric or ionization detectors. The message identifies Smoke and Heat detectors and Input and Output RCU devices. It requires an addressable input or addressable output device to interface with the PEGAsys system (i. This timer senses an abnormality in the Central Control Module CPU. A device without the electronics necessary to tie directly to the multiplex trunk. provide DC voltage to the Power Supply in the event of an AC power failure.e. Percent of smoke obscuration per foot. Also called Signal Line Circuit (SLC). Provides primary and secondary system power. A device with the features of an addressable device but additionally has the computing power to make alarm decisions based on stored calibration and environmental data. Style Z or four Class B. The Receiver/Transmitter module is located in the Central Control Panel enclosure and functions as a data transmission interface between the Central Control Module and remote control units (RCUs). An addressable or smart field device. Relay Output Module Relay Output RCU Remote Control Unit (RCU) RX/TX Module Signal Audible Output Module Smart Smoke Detector Smart Device Standard Fire Alarm Device State System Pow er Supply T-TAP Trouble Relay Type Variable Identifier Module Watch Dog Timer % /ft. If the timer is not reset. All circuits are supervised for an open or short condition. Trouble. it times out and indicates a system trouble. After initailly detecting smoke the detector enters an alert state where it measures smoke concentration every two seconds. Each module contains four individual programmable SPDT 2 Amp 24 Vdc relays. Smart smoke detectors (ionization or photoelectric) measure smoke level every nine seconds within their smoke sensing chamber. it periodically resets the timer. Also the device transmits and receives analog values. A total of eight (8) Relay Output Modules may be used in the system for a total of thirty-two (32) circuits. it sends a pre-alarm or alarm signal to the Central Control Panel. The stand-by batteries are located in the Central Control Panel enclosure.PEGAsys™ Ow ner Locations PC Line Memory locations that are programmable by the owner to store a 39-character alphanumeric description of the location of the initiating and control devices and output modules and circuits. There are eight (8) field programmable states a RCU may be programmed to: Alarm. Stand-by batteries.. conventional smoke and heat detectors). located in the Central Control Panel enclosure. Abort. Typically mounts in a 4-inch square electrical box. A non-programmable relay which operates during any system trouble condition. An addressable or smart field device that provides a relay contact to control a device such as a fan. If the detector detects smoke three out of four samples. A code on the display that identifies an RCU’s status. Manual Alarm. 2 Amp polarized signal circuits. See multi drop Line. and condition of the detector. Only allowable in Style 4 configuration. See Internal Identifier (I001-I255).

CD CT DISCON DISP DR EW EX INP IT L9 LEV.L. ZA Meaning Off All Right Open Optional Relay Output Power Communications Line Power Supply Password Pre-alarm Off Pre-alarm Printer Program Remote Panel Real Time Control Relay Output Module Signal Output Module Short Supervisory Trouble RCU Test No Good Trouble Off RCU Test Unknown Device Connected Voltage Zone Alarm 76-100016-001 G-1 July 2003 .V.S.L. Meaning RS-232-C Alarm Verification Acknowledge Address Alarm Alarm Off Battery Combinational Logic Contact Detector Error City Tie Disconnect Panel Display Drift Error EEPROM Write Error External Trouble Input Illegal RCU Type Line + 9V Trouble Level Line Voltage Trouble NOV RAM Access Error No good Not Registered Owner Location Abbreviation OF OK OP OR OUT PC P. C. LV NA NG NR O.W. RTC RY SG SH SPV TBL TE TOF TST UK VOLT. ACK ADDR.P. P. POF PRE PRNT PROG R. ALM AOF BAT.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX G DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation 232 A.

PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. July 2003 G-2 76-100016-001 .

0 26.0 27.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX H WIRING REQUIREMENTS FOR PEGASYS SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (RX/TX) RECOMMENDED WIRE TYPES For best results. Belden Wire & Cable Co.0 20.0 19.0 16.0 76-100016-001 H-1 July 2003 . Belden Wire & Cable Co. unshielded.0 15. Comtran Corporation Belden Wire & Cable Co. where 1 pf = 10-6 µf) per foot for the RX/TX’s signaling-line circuit. addressable-fire-alarm wire with a nominal wire-to-wire capacitance of approximately 20 pf (i. Belden Wire & Cable Co. picofarads.0 20. Inc.0 19.0 18. low-capacitance.0 13.0 25.5 22. Inc..0 25.5 18.0 29. use twisted.e. West Penn Wire West Penn Wire Coleman Cable Coleman Cable Clifford of Vermont.5 16. West Penn Wire Coleman Cable Coleman Cable Clifford of Vermont. BSC C Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems 16 Atlas Wire & Cable Corp.0 17.0 15. BSC C Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Part Number 228-18-1-1TP D 980 60980B 98181 98820 1P18 B1 FPL-M 4184 5320UJ 9571 6320UJ 341802E 4050 4431 4631 228-16-1-1TP D 990 98161 98620 1P16 B1 FPL-M 4234 5220UJ 9572 6220UJ 341602E 4051 4432 4632 Rating FP L FP L F P LP FP L F P LR FP L F P LR FP L F P LR F P LP F P LP FP L F P LR F P LP FP L FP L FP L F P LR FP L F P LR FP L F P LR F P LP F P LP FP L F P LR F P LP Cap (pf/ft.0 27.0 20.0 18.) 12.0 15.0 12. Comtran Corporation Belden Wire & Cable Co. Typical wire types that meet these criteria are indicated below: Wire Siz e (AWG) 18 Manufacturer Atlas Wire & Cable Corp. Belden Wire & Cable Co.0 17.0 12.5 29.

BSC C Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems 12 Coleman Cable Coleman Cable Genesis Cable Systems Genesis Cable Systems Part Number 228-14-1-1TP 98141 98420 4240 9580 6120UJ 341402E 4052 4433 4633 98121 98200 4054 4434 Rating FP L FP L F P LR F P LR F P LR F P LP F P LP FP L F P LR F P LP FP L F P LR FP L F P LR Cap (pf/ft. = 38.0 19. Try #14 AWG wire. P/N 98141 (from Recommended Wire Listing). Use larger wire.0 25.000 ft. The total SLC wiring resistance is using #18 AWG is: 6.0 27. Class-B.000 ft.000 ft. = 24. Try #18 AWG wire first. P/N 98141. The total SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG is: 6.385 Ω/1. 2 Determine the proper wire size for a Class-A.0 19. Coleman Cable Coleman Cable Comtran Corporation Belden Wire & Cable Co. x 20 x 10-12 farads/ft. EXAMPLE NO. 0. The total SLC wiring resistance is: 7.9 Ω.000 ft. is acceptable. X 4.0 22. The wire-pair length for this SLC is 3.016 Ω/1.0 21.0 EXAMPLE NO.PEGAsys™ Wire Siz e (AWG) 14 Manufacturer Atlas Wire & Cable Corp.0 20. Style-4 SLC with 160 RCUs and a total wire length of 7. X 2.0 29. The total SLC wiring resistance (38. Note: Capacitance values correspond to a pair of wires as compared to resistance values that correspond to a single conductor. If we select Coleman Cable wire.3 Ω.9 20.500 ft.525 Ω/1. Coleman Cable wire.075 x 10-6 farads (or. and is not the linear distance from the control unit to the most-remote RCU.5 20.0 21.075 µf).000 ft. Style-6 SLC with 100 RCUs and a total wire length 6. July 2003 H-2 76-100016-001 .000 feet.500 feet. X 6. and this value is used for the SLC’s capacitance calculation. Try #16 AWG next. 1 Determine the recommended wire size for a daisy-chained. The total wire length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs for both the primary and redundant communications circuits.1 Ω. = .3 Ω) when using #18 AWG wire exceeds the maximum SLC wiring resistance of 26 Ω.) 14.750 feet.750 ft.0 25. and is not the linear distance from the control unit to the most-remote RCU. Belden Wire & Cable Co. = 18. the total SLC wiring capacitance is: 3.0 27. The total wire length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs.

the total SLC wiring capacitance is: 3. = . Coleman Cable wire.1 Ω) when using #16 AWG wire is less than the maximum SLC wiring resistance of 26 Ω. 0.000 ft.PEGAsys™ The total SLC wiring resistance (24.06 µf).06 x 10-6 farads (or. The SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG wire is acceptable. 76-100016-001 H-3 July 2003 . is acceptable. If we select Coleman Cable wire. x 20 x 10-12 farads/ft. P/N 98161. P/N 98161 (from Recommended Wire Listing).

PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. July 2003 H-4 76-100016-001 .

Component Central Control Module Receiver/Transmitter Module Power Supply Module (Revision XC) Power Supply Module (Revision AC) Agent Release Module Signal Audible Module Relay Output Module City Tie Module Basic I/O Motherboard Multi-Loop Motherboard Addressable Input Device Addressable Output Device Addressable Input Device Addressable Output Device Page No.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX I SYSTEM DRAWINGS This appendix provides installation diagrams and instructions for various PEGAsys™ system modules. I-2 I-6 I-8 I-9 I-11 I-14 I-17 I-18 I-20 I-22 I-24 I-25 I-26 I-27 76-100016-001 I-1 July 2003 .

REP 1 REP 2 PEGAsys™ BT1 RS-485 PORT JK1 1 24V 5V 0V 5V 0V TB6 RX/TX PORT TO REMOTE PC FOR PROGRAMMING TO EXTERNAL PRINTER 24 VDC FROM POWER SUPPLY PROCESSOR PORT DISPLAY RESET SWITCH DISPLAY TROUBLE LED BUZZER PLG2 SW1 PRINT PORT DS1 PLG3 0V EARTH FLT SUPPLY FLT DISP PORT PC PORT EARTH FAULT JK1 JK2 JK3 PLG2 SUPPLY FAULT 24 VDC 24V PRINT PORT PLG1 DISPLAY 0V TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/ Display and Control Assembly (PEGAsys) PLG1 76-100016-001 DISPLAY PORT PC PORT TB6 July 2003 SOUNDER 1 B A + + C V/F RELAY FAULT NO NC C SOUNDER 2 A B + + VOLT FREE RELAYS 2 1 NO NC C NO NC TB4 TB5 TB1 TB2 TB3 SKT1 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY SEE NOTE 1 JP4 SEE NOTE 1 JP3 CCM RESET BUTTOM JP1 SW1 SEE NOTE 1 IC1 JP2 JK5 TO OUTPUT MODULES AND POWER SUPPLIES JK4 I-2 JK2 PLG2 JK3 TO RX/TX LOOP CONTROLLER 24 VDC FROM POWER SUPPLY .

5 A 240 mA 240 mA 440 mA 225 mA 520 mA 458 mA 700 mA 420 mA 10 OHM 10. 8. NOT UL LISTED. TB2 NO NC C TB3 NOTE: THE TROUBLE RELAY CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN THE UNPOWERED STATE. I-3 DEVICE PART NO.4 A 2. SOUNDER/RELEASE CIRCUITS ARE RATED AT 24VDC. EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP LENGTH. A 220 OHM (5W MIN.FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS. "ON" TIME COMMENT AGENT RELEASE OFF ON OFF ON RESISTANCE (min. — — — 10. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50).G — — — 2. NOT FM APPROVED. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION 1.5W. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) 10K.4 A 2. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS 75. PEGAsys™ July 2003 .G WIRE LENGTH (FT. 0. 6. JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS FOR SOUNDER 1 DEVICE Imax.D.4mA/CIRCUIT 3. UL LISTED ONLY. 890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 FM SOLENOID GROUP A B. NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL. 4.9 OHM 103 OHM 103 OHM 59 OHM 108 OHM 46 OHM 52 OHM 34 OHM 57 OHM MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS --— — — — — — FM APPROVED ONLY. NOT FM APPROVED. VOLT FREE RELAYS (PROGRAMMABLE) FAULT RELAY V / F RELAY FAULT NO NC C TB1. SUPERVISORY CURRENT . THE FOLLOWING TABLE SHALL BE USED.8 OHM 12 OHM 15. POSITION OF RELAY OUTPUTS DURING NORMAL STANDBY MODE. 2A POWER LIMITED. ALL RELAY OUTPUTS (VOLT/FREE RELAYS AND V/F RELAY) ARE RATED AT 30VDC. 5. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SOLENOIDS 890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 FM GROUPS SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS A.B.NOTES: 7.) RELEASING 76-100016-001 890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 FM SOLENOID GROUP A B. S .FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS. 1A.) RESISTOR COULD BE USED TO SIMULATE THE CIRCUIT IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.D E. NOT UL LISTED. IF MP01 IS CONFIGURED AS A RELEASING OUTPUT.D E. SIGNAL SOUNDER JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 ON OFF ON OFF 2. THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO.) 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG --— — — — — — COMMENT 12 AWG 300 300 300 380 3000 3000 2300 200 200 200 240 2000 2000 1460 800 800 570 800 340 2000 760 480 1200 120 120 120 150 1200 1200 915 3000 1440 1440 940 1570 760 500 760 480 300 525 340 220 370 9.XXX FM APPROVED ONLY. L .2. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. UL LISTED ONLY. TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT THE RELEASING DEVICE. MEASURE THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL BLOCK.0 A 1.E. CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.G TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/ Display and Control Assembly (PEGAsys) MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.

PEGAsys™ TB4 OR TB5 A + B 3 4 + B 3 4 - 2 CLASS A “Z" STYLE TB4 OR TB5 S L A 2 CLASS B “Y" STYLE EOR EOR = 10K OHM S L N/A 5 + - 5 + - - TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/ Display and Control Assembly (PEGAsys) July 2003 I-4 76-100016-001 .

D 2. 2. SOLENOID PART NO. 486500. TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/ Display and Control Assembly (PEGAsys) 2.L.5 OHMS . MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.5 OHMS . 486500-01 SINGLE SOLENOID TB4 TB4 SINGLE SOLENOID I-5 BLK BLK L S MICROSWITCH L S BLU YEL 2 - 2 - WHT SAFETY FUSE SOLENOID 3 + NOTES: RED 3 + NOTES: 1. 1. LISTED) S 2 3 S S L 2 L L 2 - 2 - 1 3 + NOTES: NOTES: 1. PEGAsys™ July 2003 . FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. D.L.0 OHMS. 895630 (U. 897494 76-100016-001 SINGLE SOLENOID TB4 TB4 TB4 SINGLE SOLENOID SINGLE CONTROL HEAD GROUPS A.SOLENOID PART NO. 2. E.GROUPS B.3 OHMS . MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE: 2. 890181. LISTED) SOLENOID PART NO. G 2. 1. 899175 (U. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2.6 OHMS.GROUP A 1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. 2. G (U.L.L. B. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 6.7 OHMS. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS. 3 + 3 + NOTES: 1. LISTED) SOLENOID PART NO. LISTED) (U. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2.GROUP E.

SMART DEVICES MAY UTILIZE T-TAP WIRING METHOD IN CLASS B. STYLE 7 JP2 JP3 RELAY OUTPUT DEVICES: PRODUCT NO. SW 1 .2.4 VDC 19. BOX 74-200012-002 BASE MOUNT 74-200012-004 ORION XT INTERFACE MODULE PRODUCT NO. MAXIMUM 20 LOOP ISOLATORS EXCLUDING ONE ON RX/TX CAN BE INSTALLED ON PC LINE. STYLE 6 (4-WIRE) PC LINE CONFIGURATION IS RECOMMENDED TO FULLY UTILIZE LOOP ISOLATION FUNCTION.PC LINE REST/DISCONNECT 24V FROM TERM.0 OHMS 255 100 mV RMS LED 1 .RED LED INDICATES RXTX RESET WHEN ON. 4.25 uF 26. NO MORE THAN 30 LOOP DEVICES BETWEEN TWO ADJACENT LOOP ISOLATORS. 5. 2.STYLE SEVEN (7) REQUIRES THE USE OF LOOP ISOLATORS. 2 & 3.24 VDC (RED) RET (BLK) RS232 PORT FOR COMMUNICATION WITH CCM. VOLTAGE: MAX. INC. 3. SW 2 .1. STYLE 4 CONFIGURATION ONLY.WHEN LOOP ISOLATOR USED: PLUG IN THE LOOP ISOLATOR (RXTX) 74-200012-001 LED1 LED2 LOOP ISOLATOR RX/TX 4. 77-297103-000 OPEN OUT SHORTED SHORTED W1 & W2 SEE NOTE 4 W1 W2 PEGAsys™ KIDDE-FENWAL. 70-407002-00X 70-407003-001 70-407004-001 70-407008-001 70-407008-002 1. THE RXTX MODULE REQUIRES THE USE OF ONE (1) P/N 74-200012-001 ISOLATOR MODULE TO OPERATE IN THE STYLE 7 CONFIGURATION. LINE CAPACITANCE: MAX. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.GREEN LED INDICATES NORMAL OPERATION OF RXTX PC LINE SEE NOTE 4 TRANSMITTER WHEN BLINKING. NUMBER OF RCU'S: MAX.CPU RESET. TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Receiver/Transmitter Module (PEGAsys) RX/TX ASSEMBLY 74-200005-001 76-100016-001 . MAXIMUM OF 255 LOOP DEVICES PER RX/TX LOOP. (OPTIONAL) LOOP ISOLATOR 74-200012-001 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS AND INTERCONNECT IT USING FLEX CABLES TO J3 ON PC LINE NORMAL SW1 SHORT-1 CPU RESET SW2 I-6 1 SHORT-2 PC LINE RESET T1 T1 J3 JP3 JP2 12 1 2 3 4 MAX VOLTAGE: MIN. ANY COMBINATION OF DEVICE TYPE IS ACCEPTABLE. RIPPLE VOLTAGE: 26. CPU RESET RXTX. CONTACT INPUT DEVICES: PRODUCT NO'S. 70-401001-000 70-401004-000 71-401001-000 71-401004-000 JUMPER STYLE 6 SHORTED IN IN OPEN OUT LOOP ISOLATORS: PRODUCT NO.'S 70-408002-000 70-408003-000 70-408004-001 RX/TX 76-100005-001 RX/TX 4. MAKE SURE THAT UNEVEN PINS ARE INTERCONNECTED. MA 01721 J3 July 2003 24 VDC FROM POWER SUPPLY NOTES: 70-402001-100 71-402001-100 70-404001-100 70-403001-XXX RX/TX MODULE J1 J2 STYLE 4 OPEN IN IN STYLE 6 w/LOOP ISO. LED 2 . ASHLAND.'S RXTX 74-200012-001 ELECT. LINE RESISTANCE: MAX. ARRANGEMENTS FOR PC LINE WIRING SMART DETECTORS USED: PRODUCT NO'S.0 VDC 0.

MAXIMUM 20 LOOP ISOLATORS PER RX/TX LOOP. 5. FOR CONNECTIONS TO THE LOOP DEVICES OTHER THAN LOOP ISOLATORS. 6.FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS. PEGAsys™ July 2003 TB1 OF RX/TX LOOP ISOLATOR 74-200012-001 MUST BE INSTALLED ON RX/TX WHEN USING LOOP ISOLATORS. SEE INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS OF THE PARTICULAR DEVICE. EXCLUDING ISOLATOR MOUNTED ON RX/TX MODULE. FOR STYLE 7 WIRING BETWEEN DEVICES AND ADJACENT ISOLATORS MUST BE IN CONDUIT. 3 ZONE 1 SEE NOTE 5 7 ZONE 3 TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Receiver/Transmitter Module (PEGAsys) LOOP ISOLATOR L 1234 S LOOP ISOLATOR NOTE: ADJACENT LOOP ISOLATORS MUST BE WITHIN 20 FEET OF DEVICE WITH WIRING IN CONDUIT. L S 3 7 .CLASS A. . 3. . STYLE 7 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT NOTES: LOOP ISOLATOR 3 7 ZONE 2 LOOP ISOLATOR LOOP ISOLATOR LOOP ISOLATOR 1. SEE DETAILED INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM.FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS. STYLE 4 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT 1 L 2 3 4 L S 1234 S TB1 OF RX/TX I-7 CLASS A. DENOTES SMART DETECTOR CONTACT INPUT & RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE. LOOP ISOLATOR DEVICES ARE POLARIZED. THIS DEVICE IS NOT POLARIZED. STYLE 6 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT 3 3 7 7 3 1 2 ZONE 1 ZONE 3 DETECTOR BASE 4 L LOOP ISOLATOR LOOP ISOLATOR S CLASS B. STYLE 6 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT W/LOOP ISOLATORS 3 7 LOOP ISOLATOR LOOP ISOLATOR 76-100016-001 ZONE 2 CLASS A. 2. 4. NO MORE THAN 20 FEET FROM DEVICE.

4VDC. MA 01721 KIDDE-FENWAL. S L R . THIS RESET MAY BE CAUSED EITHER BY SOFTWARE OR BY MANUAL RESET OF THE MICROCONTROLLER BY PRESSING S3.5A 24VDC RETURN 24VDC AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT #1.0ADC) 24VDC RETURN SUPERVISION NOTES: 1.LOW BATTERY . NEUTRAL OUT TO POWER SUPPLY #1 TROUBLE OUTPUT VOLT-FREE RELAY CONTACTS RATED AT 2A. ALL RS-485 INTERCONNECTIONS MUST BE WITHIN THE SAME ROOM WITH THE MAIN PANEL. POSITION. 24VDC AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT #2. POWER LIMITED TO 1. FROM POWER SUPPLY #1 CURRENT SHARING COMMON FOR BOTH POWER SUPPLIES 24VDC POWER (4.AC LINE POWER IN AC NEUTRAL IN EARTH GROUND (120/240VAC. . SOLDER A 0 OHM. (NOTE 2) (NOTE 2) 2.FOR REGULATED OUTPUTS. DS1. SHALL REMAIN ILLUMINATED AS LONG AS THE TROUBLE RELAY IS IN THE N. POWER LIMITED TO 1.INSTALL THE JUMPER IF THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD IS HOOKED AS THE LAST DEVICE ON THE RS485 I/O BUS. S3: HARD RESET OF MICROPROCESSOR ON POWER SUPPLY/CHARGER ASSEMBLY BOARD. W4. BATTERIES SHALL BE REPLACED EVERY 48 MONTHS OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. WHEN AN AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT IS CONFIGURED TO BE RESETTABLE. REMOVE THE JUMPER OTHERWISE. .POWER SUPPLY FAIL . 76-100016-001 .BATTERY FAIL . THE OUTPUT SHALL TRANSFER FROM 24VDC TO 0V WHENEVER THE MICROCONTROLLER IS IN RESET. THE OUTPUT SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT 0V AS LONG AS THE MICROCONTROLLER IS HELD IN RESET.FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS. I/O BUS COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE FROM CCM R RET 24VDC POWER TO CCM FACTORY 24VDC RETURN INSTALLATION 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX 24VDC RETURN 24VDC POWER TO MOTHERBOARD FIELD 24VDC RETURN INSTALLATION I/O BUS COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE TO MOTHERBOARD L L 4.COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE 15A FUSE W1. INC. 1 2 BAT RS485 MOTHER BD CCM RET 24V RET 24V 06-129562-002 AUX 1 AUX 2 SYSTEM POWER July 2003 TROUBLES INCLUDE: .GROUND FAULT (POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE) . “SYS GND” TERMINAL OF TB6 SHALL BE USED TO INTERCONNECT 24 V RETURNS BETWEEN MULTIPLE POWER SUPPLIES. (NOTE 5) R RET 24V + - 3.5A 24VDC RETURN FIELD INSTALLATION TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Power Supply (PEGAsys) 7. CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUST BE GREATER THAN 22VDC BEFORE CONNECTING BATTERIES TO PANEL. 5.MICROCONTROLLER FAILURE . 1/4 W ESISTOR ACROSS W5 PADS WHEN USING 220 VAC POWER. 6.0ADC) FROM POWER SUPPLY #2 SUPERVISION 24VDC RETURN PEGAsys™ 24V RET SHARE 24V RET SEE NOTE 7 NO GREEN LED TBL RLY C NC SPV SPV N AC OUT 1 2 AC IN L L N G DC IN 1 DC IN 2 L N F ASHLAND. S3 SYS GND FIELD INSTALLATION AC LINE OUT TO POWER SUPPLY #2 AC NEUTRAL OUT TO POWER SUPPLY #2 FACTORY INSTALLATION AC LINE OUT TO POWER SUPPLY #1 AC.CUT OUT W1 TO CONFIGURE THE POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY SO THAT IT MAY USE A BATTERY PAIR CHARGED BY ANOTHER ASSEMBLY.AC FAIL .O. 20.FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS. I-8 S1 A (2) 12VDC SEALED LEAD ACID BATTERIES S2 15A 24V B 1 2 R RET 24V RS-485 TWISTED PAIR CONNECTION. 30VDC (NOTE 1) THE GREEN LED.4VDC TO 26. THE TROUBLE RELAY IS SHOWN IN THE UNPOWERED STATE AND WILL TRANSFER UPON ANY POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE OR POWER OFF CONDITION. 60/50Hz) 24VDC POWER (4. S1 AND S2 USE TO ADDRESS POWER SUPPLY/CHARGER ASSEMBLY.

WHT BLK/WHT ORN RED RED BLK BLK VIO AC OUT 2 1 24V SPV 24V RET RET SPV MAIN POWER SUPPLY SHARE 76-100016-001 AC IN L L N G DC IN 1 DC IN 2 N L N I-9 WHT BLK/WHT BLK TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Power Supply (PEGAsys) PEGAsys™ AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY BLK VIO RED RED ORN July 2003 .

E. MA 01721 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 --— — — — — — 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 200 200 200 240 2000 2000 1460 800 800 570 800 340 2000 760 480 1200 120 120 120 150 1200 1200 915 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 1440 1440 940 1570 760 500 760 FM SOLENOID GROUP A B. THE FOLLOWING SWITCHES MUST BE SET FOR SOLENOID(S). — — — DEVICE Imax.9 OHM 103 OHM 103 OHM 59 OHM 108 OHM 46 OHM 52 OHM 34 OHM 57 OHM MOMENTARY MOMENTARY MOMENTARY CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Release Module (PEGAsys) 76-100016-001 .2 ON OFF ON OFF RELEASE 76-200001-001 SEE NOTE 11 SEE NOTE 6 S1 SOL ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 8. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION REFER TO DATA SHEETS 75. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL.0 A RELEASE CIRCUIT . NOT UL LISTED. 0. UL LISTED ONLY. CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS CONNECTED. EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP LENGTH. NOT FM APPROVED.4 A 2. S .D E.1 S3. THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO.2.1 POSITION ASSIGNMENTS SOLENOIDS 12.B. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT RESET SWITCH SEE NOTE 6 4. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24.5 A 240 mA 240 mA 440 mA 225 mA 520 mA 458 mA 700 mA 420 mA 10 OHM 10.2. NOT UL LISTED.8 OHM 12 OHM 15.) 14 AWG 16 AWG I-10 RESISTANCE (min. 890181 899175 895630 897494 486500 486500-01 81-100000-001 06-118329-001 06-118384-001 OFF --— — — — — — FM APPROVED ONLY.4 A (MOMENTARY) .FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS 6. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS: SIGNAL CIRCUIT . TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT THE RELEASING DEVICE. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES 1 AUXILIARY POWER 5. S1 SOL SQB DUAL SINGLE SOLENOID SOLENOID X X X - RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION 7 8 9 10 11 12 SIGNAL CIRCUITS 12 RELEASE MODULE KIDDE-FENWAL.XXX SERIES 10.) "ON" TIME COMMENT MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL. 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT 3.10K.FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS 11.2. MODULE ADDRESS 1 2 3 4 TROUBLE LED SWITCH POSITION S4. NOT FM APPROVED. SWITCH S1 POSITION ASSIGNMENTS L . WIRE LENGTH (FT. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50). 9.G 3000 12 AWG 300 300 300 380 3000 3000 2300 FM GROUPS SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS A. — — — SWITCH S3.0 VDC ON S4 S3 PEGAsys™ 7.D.4 mA/CIRCUIT 2. ASHLAND.D E.0 A 1. MEASURE THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL BLOCK.MODULE NOTES: 1 2 1 2 SQB 1 RELEASING July 2003 06-129567-001 1.0 A (CONTINUOUS) SUPERVISORY CURRENT . A 220 OHM (5W MIN) RESISTOR COULD BE USED TO SIMULATE THE RELEASING CIRCUIT IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.5W. MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM. FM SOLENOID GROUP A B. JUMPERS W1 & W2 MUST BE CUT OUT WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED. UL LISTED ONLY. SOLENOIDS COMMENT 890181 1 2 3 4 5 6 RELEASE CIRCUITS DEVICE 18 AWG TB1 PART NO.G 480 300 525 340 220 370 FM APPROVED ONLY. THE FOLLOWING TABLE SHALL BE USED. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) .2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF S4.2.4 A 2. INC.G 2.

SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. 486500-01 (U. TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Release Module (PEGAsys) 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0. 2.1 TO "OFF ". 2. LISTED) SINGLE SOLENOID TB1 1 L SIGNAL CIRCUITS SINGLE SOLENOID TB1 TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 1 2 S TB1 7 8 + CKT #1 S L I-11 2 2 BLK 3 L MICROSWITCH 2 RED 3 4 S 10K EOR S L BLK 3 BLU WHT 4 + 5 6 BLK 5 BLU WHT S L + - + + - + CKT #1 + RED BLK 4 + CKT #2 RED 5 11 10 S L BLU 3 9 + - CKT #2 S 10K EOR L WHT 4 5 6 YEL BLK + SOLENOID - YEL YEL SAFETY FUSE 6 S BLK L 6 12 + CKT #2 10K EOR NOTES: 1.L. LISTED) SINGLE DUAL 1 CONTROL HEAD S 3 2 TB1 TB1 1 L 76-100016-001 SINGLE SOLENOID TB1 1 TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 1 2 S CONTROL HEAD 2 2 + 3 3 3 + 4 5 RET. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3.L.0 OHMS. SWITCH S3.SOLENOID PART NO. 897494 (U. 890181 AND 895630 (U. NOTES: 1. 1 TO "OFF ".6 OHMS.7 OHMS.L. 899175 TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 1 1 S L SOLENOID PART NO. NOTES: 1. PEGAsys™ July 2003 . 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. S L 2 + L + 3 L AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION CKT #1 +24V TB1 1 2 S 4 S 3 2 CKT #1 4 S 1 CKT #1 L 4 5 6 6 + + 2 3 + 5 L + 5 6 1 6 CKT #2 1 CKT #2 - CKT #2 NOTES: 1. 1 TO "OFF ".1 TO "OFF ". SOLENOID PART NO. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0. LISTED) SOLENOID PART NO. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 6.6 OHMS. SWITCH S3. 486500. SWITCH S3. NOTE: JUMPERS W1 & W2 TO BE REMOVED WHEN AUXILIARY POWER USED. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION.

2. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION.L. LISTED) SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 L TB1 TB1 1 2 2 + 2 S + 2 3 - + 3 3 4 S L 3 CKT #1 L + L - CKT #1 - CKT #1 4 + S S + 4 4 S 5 6 CKT #2 6 - + L 5 CKT #2 - 5 5 - - CKT #2 6 6 NOTES: 1. I-12 GROUP E. NOTES: 1. 2.L. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 2.3 OHMS.July 2003 FM GROUP SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS GROUP A (U. . SWITCH S3.1 TO "OFF ". SWITCH S3.G (U. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 2. LISTED) SINGLE SOLENOID TB1 1 2 + TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 1 L S + 2 3 3 CKT #1 L - S + 4 5 - + 4 5 CKT #2 6 S L - TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Release Module (PEGAsys) 76-100016-001 6 NOTES: 1.D (U. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 1. SWITCH S3.5 OHMS. 2.L. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION.1 TO "OFF ". LISTED) SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS TB1 1 1 1 L S + PEGAsys™ GROUP B. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION.5 OHMS.1 TO "OFF ".

4.2 SW1. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50). MA 01721 12 76-100016-001 06-129569-001 SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE ON RESET SWITCH TROUBLE LED SEE NOTE 4 MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT SEE NOTE 5 MODULE ADDRESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1. 76-100003-001 TB1 SEE NOTE 8 SOUNDER CIRCUITS 1-4 5. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. JUMPERS W9 & W10 MUST BE CUT OUT WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED. NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL. USING JUMPER AND DIP SWITCH SETTINGS SHOWN ON SHEETS 2 & 3. STYLE "Z". MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM.2. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT SIG.2. S I-13 . TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Signal Audible Module (PEGAsys) PEGAsys™ July 2003 . ONLY POLARIZED SIGNALLING DEVICES TO BE USED.10K.4 mA/CIRCUIT 2.2 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF SWITCH POSITION SW2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION REFER TO DATA SHEETS 75. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) . 6.1 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF NOTES: 1. STYLE "Y" OR 1 CLASS A.FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS L .0 A SUPERVISORY CURRENT .1 2 1 2 1 2 AUXILIARY POWER NOT USED 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 KIDDE-FENWAL.5W. 10. ASHLAND.XXX SERIES. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL. AUD. INC. EITHER SOUNDER OUTPUT (2) MAY BE CONFIGURED FOR EITHER 2 CLASS B. 7. 0. 9.FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS 8. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS: SIGNAL CIRCUIT .0 VDC 3.

1 SW3.2 JUMPERS W1 W2 W3 W4 ON ON ON OFF AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION TB1 +24VDC AUXILIARY POWER 1 RET 2 TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Signal Audible Module (PEGAsys) 76-100016-001 . STYLE "Z" TB1 5 6 7 + 8 + 9 10 10K EOR TB1 5 CIRCUIT 1 L S L S L L S S CIRCUIT 1 10K 10K EOR CIRCUIT 2 6 7 + 8 + 9 10K EOR 10K EOR EOR CIRCUIT 2 L S L S CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 3 10K CIRCUIT 4 L S 10K 10 11 + 12 + SWITCHES W6 W1 ON ON W2 JUMPERS W3 ON W4 OFF W5 OFF EOR EOR 11 + 12 + SWITCHES W6 OFF W7 OFF W8 ON SW2. STYLE "Y" AND 1 CLASS A.2 OFF I-14 W5 ON ON ON OFF ON ON W7 W8 SW2. STYLE "Y" 2 CLASS B.July 2003 PEGAsys™ 4 CLASS B.1 ON SW3.

2 CLASS A. STYLE "Z" AND 2 CLASS B.1 SW3.2 ON W1 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF W2 W3 W4 W5 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Signal Audible Module (PEGAsys) PEGAsys™ July 2003 . STYLE "Y" TB1 5 CIRCUIT 1 76-100016-001 6 L S 10K EOR 6 - L S 10K EOR 7 + + 7 8 + 8 + 9 CIRCUIT 3 9 L S L S CIRCUIT 3 10 10K EOR 10 10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 4 L S - 11 + 11 + 12 + 12 + I-15 SWITCHES W6 W7 W8 SW2.2 JUMPERS JUMPERS W1 OFF W2 OFF W3 OFF W4 ON W5 ON W6 ON W7 ON W8 OFF SWITCHES SW2.1 OFF SW3. STYLE "Z" TB1 5 CIRCUIT 1 1 CLASS A.

PEGAsys™ RELAY 76-10004-001 TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Relay Output Module (PEGAsys) July 2003 I-16 76-100016-001 .

PEGAsys™ CITY TIE 76-100002-001 TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram City Tie Module (PEGAsys) 76-100016-001 I-17 July 2003 .

PEGAsys™

TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram City Tie Module (PEGAsys)
July 2003 I-18 76-100016-001

J9
RS-485

76-100016-001

TB2 W1
COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B RET

R1

J1 J3

J2

J4

J5

J6

J7

J8

+24V

TB1

1. POWER CONNECTIONS: 1). TB1 BRINGS 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY TB5 OR TB6 TERMINAL BLOCKS. 2). 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES (J1) FROM TB5 OR TB6 ON POWER SUPPLY. 3). TERMINAL TB1 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO OUTPUT MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.

I-19

2. COMMUNICATIONS: 1). J9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES OUTPUT MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. 2). J1 THROUGH J8 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN OUTPUT MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. 3). RS232 COMMUNICATIONS FOR RX/TX MODULE TO BE PROVIDED THROUGH PHONE CABLE PLUGGED INTO "RX/TX" PORT ON CCM. 4). TB2 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANELS' MOTHER BOARD AND POWER SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. 1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24VDC AND BLACK FOR RET. 2. JUMPER W1 SHOULD BE IN. MAKE SURE THAT JUMPER W4 ON POWER SUPPLY CONTROL BOARD IS OUT.

TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Basic I/0 Motherboard (PEGAsys)

NOTE:

PEGAsys™

July 2003

PEGAsys™
TO CCM RS-485 PORT TO POWER SUPPLY TO CCM RX/TX PORT

UT TP LE OU DU MO

TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Basic Output Motherboard (PEGAsys)
July 2003 I-20 76-100016-001

/TX E RXDUL MO

COMMUNICATIONS: 1).JP10 RS-232 76-100016-001 TB11 RET +24V TB8 RS-485 TB7 TB6 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 TB1 JP9 W1 JP8 JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 JP3 JP2 TB10 JP1 COM TBL COM ALM SIG GND 485A 485B RET J1 J4 J6 J2 J3 J5 J7 +24V TB9 1. TB10 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANEL MOTHERBOARD AND POWER SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. 2). TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Multi-Loop Motherboard (PEGAsys) NOTE: PEGAsys™ July 2003 . THE FIRST RX/TX MODULE (LOOP #1) SHOULD BE ALWAYS ON THE FAR RIGHT AND INTERCONNECTED TO JP1 AND TB1. TB9 AND TB11 BRING 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY TB5 AND TB6. 5). 4). TERMINAL TB9 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO OUTPUT MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX. J1 THROUGH J7 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN OUTPUT MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. JP1 THROUGH JP8 TO BE CONNECTED TO RX/TX MODULES J2 CONNECTORS TO PROVIDE RS232 COMMUNICATIONS. INSTALL THE W1 JUMPER IF THE MOTHERBOARD IS INSTALLED AS THE LAST COMPONENT ON THE RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS BUS. 3). JP9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES OUTPUT MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS. (CONNECTOR NUMBER IS ASSOCIATED WITH LOOP NUMBER). 2. 2. I-21 2). USE RED WIRES FOR +24 VDC AND BLACK FOR RET. 3). 3. OTHERWISE REMOVE THE JUMPER. ALL CONSECUTIVE RX/TX MODULES SHOULD BE PLUGGED FROM RIGHT TO LEFT STARTING FROM THE FIRST RX/TX. JP10 CONNECTS TO CCM MODULE AND SUPPLIES RS232 COMMUNICATION FOR RX/TX MODULES. 1. POWER CONNECTIONS: 1). TB1 THROUGH TB8 TO BE USED TO CONNECT 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES.

PEGAsys™ UT TP LE U O DU MO TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Multi-Loop Motherboard (PEGAsys) July 2003 I-22 76-100016-001 MO /TX E RXDUL .

TO REMOTE LED (FENWAL PART NO. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS STANDBYALARM 310uA 380uA TYPICAL CONFIGURATIONS N. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER INPUTS. WITH ALL WIRING ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH 50FT.GRAY ORANGE BROWN WHITE BN TO REMOVE CONTACT DEVICE TO CATHODE TO ANODE 1. 70-410001-000) OBSERVE POLARITY: ORANGE (ANODE).5 WATT (FENWAL PART NO.’S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND 71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT. -000 -001 DESCRIPTION NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY CLOSED FOR SUPERVISORY USE ONLY TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Addressable Contact Input Device NO/NC (Obsolete) SEE NOTE 3 PEGAsys™ July 2003 .O. NO. BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL DEVICES PER CIRCUIT. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-407002-00X THRU 70-407004-00X.. MANUAL PULL STATION BK SEE NOTE 1 EOL RD 7. I-23 EOL WATERFLOW CAT. GRAY (CATHODE) CAUTION: LED MUST BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. 5. CONTACT DEVICES 6. 76-100016-001 TO REMOTE LED NOTES N/O WH EOL SEE NOTE 3 3. LED CIRCUIT IS NOT SUPERVISED. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION OF ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE. SUPERVISED LINE FOR REMOTE CONTACT DEVICE CONNECTION. PROTECTIVE COVERING UL LABEL 4. 76-100005-001 WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO SMART DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS. WITH ALL WIRING ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT. 9. NO. 06-129025-001) EOL 2. TYPICAL PULES RATE: NORMAL: ALARM: TROUBLE: 9 SECONDS 2 SECONDS NO LED PULSING 8. 2040 PER SYSTEM. CAUTION: CONTACT DEVICE MUST BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE. EOL RESISTOR: 820 OHM . SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO. AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 150 FT.

SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO. COM. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER INPUTS. RELAY OUTPUTS ARE NOT SUPERVISED.C. 2040 PER SYSTEM. RD BK TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Addressable Relay Output Device (Obsolete) SEE NOTES 1 & 9 76-100016-001 . RATING: 2A. I-24 LED (SEE NOTE 5) 5.July 2003 BROWN ( N/C ) ORANGE ( COM ) SEE NOTE 2 FIELD CONNECTION WHITE ( N/O ) NOTES 1. N.O. Number 30-402001-000 & 76-100005-001) WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO SMART DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS. 9.6A.’S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND 71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT. MOUNTS IN 4“ SQUARE ELECTRICAL BOX. 120 VAC (RESISTIVE) 3.. LISTED GANG BOX. 8. BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL DEVICES PER CIRCUIT. MUST BE INSTALLED IN A U. PROTECTIVE COVERING UL LABEL 4. TYPICAL PULSE RATE: RELAY RESET (STANDBY): RELAY SET: TROUBLE STATE: 9 SECONDS 2 SECONDS NO LED PULSING 6. 30 VDC (RESISTIVE) . WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-408002-000 THRU 70-408003-000. CAUTION: … 2. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT.L. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS: STANDBY: 325uA PEGAsys™ N. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION OF ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT 7.

PC Line In See Note 3 (-) Remote LED (Optional) I-25 See Note 7 EOL (Listed 10KW Resistor) 9. and 4 See Note 3 (+) (-) 3. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Addressable Contact Input Device NO/NC AI. PEGAsys™ July 2003 . ASHLAND. See Notes: 1. 400 MAIN ST.O. For a total circuit wiring resistance of 50Ω max. The initiating device and remote LED annunciator (if used) must be located in the same room as the AI. 4. N/C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 76-100016-001 Typical N.5 mm2) Refer to Control Panel Manual for addressable loop wiring specification. Terminal connection supports wiring from #18 AWG (0. Maximum 25Ω resistance per wire for initiating circuit. 6. 11. N/O PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED (+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) AI. N/O initiating device circuit is NFPA Class B/Style B. NO. N/C Device is intended for use within the control equipment providing the normally closed contact. 10. Maximum 10 VDC @ 1 mA. 5. 8. TEMP. Initiating Devices NOTES 1. P/N 70-411001-005.SmartOne TM MODEL AI. Rating on LED circuit: 26 VDC Max. 7. (+) PC Line Out Typical N. 7 mA Max. All wiring is power limited and supervised. This module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors. 2. Use Listed 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor. Supervisory Devices EOL (Listed 10KW Resistor) 2. 70-407008-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235578-001 MAX. INC. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. If not used leave terminals open circuit. INSTALL. N/O CAT.75 mm2) to #14 AWG (1. The AI.C.

ASHLAND.5 mm2) See Note 3 (+) (-) PC Line Out 3. I-26 SHEET 1 of 1 REVISION - DRAWING No. 70-408004-001 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 06-235577-001 MAX. TEMP. 2. New Design TITLE Installation Wiring Diagram Addressable Relay Output Device 76-100016-001 . Terminal connection supports wiring from #18 AWG (0. MA 01721 DATE OF MANUFACTURE: TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED PC PC PC PC (+) (-) (+) (-) 1 2 3 4 N/C 5 COM 6 N/O 7 July 2003 PEGAsys™ N/O 7 6 NOTES COM N/C 5 1. 120°F FOR SERVICE SEND TO: KIDDE-FENWAL. 4. INC.SmartOne TM MODEL AO CAT. Field Connections AO must be installed in the same room as the device it is controlling .75 mm2) to #14 AWG (1. PC Line wiring is power limited and supervised. NO. See Note 3 (+) PC Line In (-) Refer to Control Panel Manual for addressable loop wiring specification. 400 MAIN ST. INSTALL.

1. Groups are numbered into logical groupings that delineate the extended coverage area and simplify programming. Each NIC (node) must be configured independently. Via a “dumb terminal. Central Station. Processing of network RESET messages: Enabled/Disabled. Any assignment from 1 to 32 means that the node actively participates in all pre-configured network activity. When an event occurs at a node. will be delivered to each of the other nodes on the network in the form of a message. Processing of network SILENCE messages: Enabled/Disabled.1 CONFIGURATION/ADDRESSING Overview Both of the two independent data channels can be enabled (Style 7). Node number: 0 to 32. Up to thirty-two (32) nodes may be networked to form groups. data transfer is redundant so that if there is a failure on one channel. Each node can be configured independently using any of the three methods described in the following paragraphs. Paragraphs detailing each option follow: • Network Style: None. Note: It is not possible to download configuration information to all the NICs on a network simultaneously.1 Q4 Q3 U8 1 R26 R28 R27 C17 1 1 R31 C15 R38 C24 R42 Q1 1 Q2 1 U6 R18 ASHLAND. or Redundant Channel (Style 7). Number 0 (the default) means that the node does not participate in any network activity. or either one of the channels can be disabled (Style 4). J-2. etc. Single-Channel (Style 4).. NETWORK STYLE 1 U12 CR2 K2 CR1 K3 K1 C27 1 U13 CR3 D TB4 TB2 TB3 TB1 RV11 R23 • U11 C12 GND +5 TP1 TP2 I1 R10 C13 Y1 TP3 TP4 TP5 1 U3 C14 U4 TP6 N1 N2 I2 RV12 K4 R46 R45 RV6 RV4 RV5 RV8 RV9 RV7 RV2 RV3 C20 • • • • • RV10 R24 E8 E1 RV1 R25 R6 R5 R4 R3 E7 E3 E6 E5 E4 E2 1 R20 R41 R40 U20 1 U19 1 U18 1 R2 R36 C2 R22 1 C5 C11 C18 R21 1 U21 R44 U14 C9 1 C8 R7 R17 R1 U15 1 U17 U16 C22 R32 U10 C16 1 R12 C25 1 R19 R13 U5 R43 C10 C1 R14 + R29 R34 C3 + U7 C23 U2 1 + C4 R33 R15 U9 • J-2. J-2 J-2. Network Interface Card (NIC) Each PEGAsys control panel which is a network node (i. The configuration process is dealt with in more detail in 76-100016-001 J-1 July 2003 . These data channels transmit network information from one node to the next. Network group number: 0 to 32. notification of the particular alarm. Note: PEGAsys SL/ML control units may be networked with PEGAsys LV Control Units NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CAT.e. or its cable. equipped with a NIC) may be assigned to a designated network group (numbered 1 through 32) or to network group 0. Figure J-1. Via PCS. INC.1. or bi-directionally if nodes are connected on either side of the transmitting node. Time resynchronization (resynch) period. MA 01721 C7 + KIDDE-FENWAL.2 NODE NUMBER ASSIGNMENT Nodes may be assigned a number from 0 to 32. which should be referred to.. The NIC mounts as a daughter card on the PEGAsys Central Control Module (CCM).” B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 N2 C26 N1 I2 I1 Below are the network options which can be configured for each node and are stored in that panel's memory. 74-200036-001 J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1 The operator can set network configuration options on the PEGAsys in three ways: • • • Via the keypad on the Central Control Module.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX J PEGASYS NETWORK INTERFACE CARD J-1 INTRODUCTION the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). abort. In Style 7 configuration. the other channel will maintain communications. Logging all events: Enabled/Disabled. trouble. The PEGAsys™ Network Interface Card (NIC) provides the capability for peer-to-peer communication between PEGAsys fire/suppression control panels (nodes). NO.

it uses its network connection to ask for the time. PROGRAMMING 7. CLEAR EVENTS 7. it can be silenced from any node on the network." J-2. If a node does not receive a resynchronization message during this interval.6 EVENT LOGGING ENABLE/DISABLE Nodes may be assigned to groups 0 through 32.RESYNCH NETWORK CLEARS ALL EVENTS INITIATED FROM REMOTE NODES AND REQUESTS A RETRANSMISSION OF ALL EXISTING EVENTS FROM ALL NODES 1. NODE NUMBER NODE NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) GROUP NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: STAND ALONE 0: NOT GROUPD 3. RESET EVENT ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK RESET ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK SILENCE LOG ALL GROUP OR ONLY NETWORK EVENTS SET RESYNC: 0(off) OR 1-60000 MIN 1:ISOLATE NODE 2:DE-ISOLATE NODE 6.1." A node assigned to groups 1 through 32 will process only those messages from nodes in the same network group unless configured to “Log All (Network) groups. J-2. This includes the receipt of an ACKNOWLEDGE from a button on a remote node.1. J-2. TIME:DATE 2. RESYNC PERIOD 9.3 NETWORK GROUP NUMBER ASSIGNMENT work group 0.4 RESET ENABLE/DISABLE Enabling “Log All Events” causes all network events to be logged at this node. or uses its own locally stored time if its query does not result in a resynch message. Network Menu July 2003 J-2 76-100016-001 .7 TIME RESYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD (SET IN MINUTES) Enabling RESET on a node means that it can be reset from any other node in its group. A node assigned to network group 0 receives and processes messages received from all nodes only if configured to “Log All Events.5 SILENCE ENABLE/DISABLE Enabling SILENCE on a node means that it can be silenced from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to network group 0. STYLE CH1: ENABLE/DISABLE CH2: ENABLE/DISABLE 2.PEGAsys™ J-2. GROUP 4.1. Disabling will result in logging events only in it’s own (non-zero) group. SILENCE EVENTS 7. it can be reset from any node on the network.1. DEVICES 4. If it is assigned to net- A time-resynchronization message is broadcast on the network at intervals determined by the resynch period. ISOLATE Figure J-2. NETWORK 8.1. J-2. 3. ADD/RMV NODES ADD OR REMOVE NODE#__ TO NODE# __ 5. PRINTER 3. LOG EVENTS 8. SET 1.

with networking Style set to “None” until changed by an operator. All of the network options listed in Paragraph J-2. depending on its own installed program.3 Configuring Networking Options via PCS • Configuration of all CCM parameters. depending on its own installed program. J-2. L L Yes L N o te: If a node i s i n group 0. J-2. L RE. or by using the panel’s membrane keypad and LCD display panel. Whether they are communicating with other panels in their local group. See the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for details. or by using the panel’s membrane keypad and LCD display panel. OPERATION J-3 Networked PEGAsys panels may be configured to communicate differently depending on: • • Whether they are assigned to network group 0 or to groups 1 through 32. however SILENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS). Model 5104. with networking style set to “None” until changed by an operator. The software will initially use default values.4 Configuring Networking Options via a “Dumb Terminal” • Network configuration can be performed through use of the system menus using a “dumb terminal” attached to 76-100016-001 J-3 . The additions to the PEGAsys menu structure are diagramed in Figure J-2. A node in a different non-zero network group configured to log all events will process network message(s) from any node in the entire network.2 PEGAsys Panel Network Menus Table J-1 summarizes these relationships.1. In addition. RE: If node i s confi gured for remote RESET Enable J-2. i t wi ll accept button pushes and events from remote nodes i f All nodes i n group 0 All nodes i n same group All nodes i n di fferent groups L Yes L SE. i t wi ll accept button pushes and events from remote nodes i f confi gured as shown below: All nodes i n all groups L SE.1 are configured via the front panel membrane keypad. J-2. A node which receives the network message from another node in the same non-zero group will process the network message appropriately.8 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION A node can be configured as a central station if that node is properly connected to a Silent Knight DACT. A node in network group zero. can be accomplished using PCS. ACKNOWLEDGE is automatic. July 2003 Configuration can be performed through the system menus which are accessible using the panel’s built-in membrane keypad and the LCD display panel. or with panels in a remote group. L RE. Network Configuration Table R emo te N o d e L o catio n AC K S IL E N C E R ESET L OG E V E N T S /E OC /R T S N o te: If a node i s i n a non-zero group. The software will initially use default values. the SILENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS).” The software will initially use default values. will not be recognized by any other nodes in network group zero for functions other than receiving messages unless it is configured to log all events in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS). the default group. In more detail: • The menu structure of the PEGAsys has been upgraded to accommodate network configuration. L RE RE. is configured to activate on any alarm on any node in the network. Note: Menus cannot be accessed with an alarm condition in effect. Central Station configuration automatically forces that node to ‘Log All Events’ and also MP04. L L L: If node i s confi gured to "Log All Groups. a volt-free relay on the CCM. L SE SE. including network parameters.2 Configuring Networking Options via the Display/Keypad the serial “PC Port. the menu provides the ability to add or remove individual or groups of nodes to/from the network. The ACKNOWLEDGE function will be automatic. J-2.PEGAsys™ Table J-1." SE: If node i s confi gured for remote SILENCE Enable. with networking style set to “None” until changed by the operator.

In case of a short circuit or a break in any of the connecting wires. July 2003 J-4 76-100016-001 . Connect panels together as shown in Figure J-4. no parity. either channel by itself can execute all network communications. eliminating the possibility of ground-loop current. and converts it to a form readable by the node’s software. The transceiver’s transmit and receive switching (in half-duplex mode) is also performed automatically by hardware. Under adverse conditions (for example. • Nodes can be added or deleted from network only via Network Menu. and must be AWG 18 or heavier gauge. the relay passes the network signals directly through the board. The NIC will either transmit locally-produced data or receive and retransmit bus activity as a repeater. This modification has no effect on normal operation of the PEGAsys panel or system. 1 stop bit (8-N-1) and 9600 baud.2. no software is needed to control this process.2.4 FAIL SAFE If a power failure occurs in a node. the NIC includes a normally closed (NC) relay which maintains the communications integrity of the network. J-4.3 REPEATER (TRANSCEIVER) The CCM board is a slightly modified version of the original CPU board designed so that the NIC will plug in as a daughter board. J-4.2 MESSAGING J-4 This paragraph describes the hardware used to implement the PEGAsys Network: • • • J-4. Its bidirectional repeater function is implemented completely in hardware.2.1 DUAL CHANNEL SUPPORT The NIC supports operation of Style 4 or Style 7 channels.2. The NIC performs the following functions: • • • • • Dual-Channel Support Messaging Repeater Fail Safe Isolation The NIC acts as a repeater. When the NIC loses power.3 Network Wiring RTS Rx Tx 1/2 NETWORK INTERFACE CARD (NIC) To CCM CPU The panels are networked by attaching two twisted.2 Network Interface Card (NIC) The NIC contains the hardware necessary for data-communication between network nodes. Under normal operation with Style 7. network communication is divided between the two channels.5 ISOLATION ISOLATED NETWORK MEDIUM TA1 TB1 Rx out Tx in Driver Enable Hardware Repeater Logic Rx/Tx Selection Logic TA2 TB2 Rx out Tx in Driver Enable NON-ISOLATED NETWORK MEDIUM One half of each channel is an isolated. Figure J-3. This assures that the chassis of any two nodes are physically disconnected. unshielded-pair cables between the appropriate NICs. The network communication channels are EIA-485 bus lines. grounded RS-485 transceiver. regenerating bus information as it moves through the NIC. While a node is not transmitting data. twisted pairs in conduit may be required. The node-to-node wire must not exceed a length of 4000 ft. this pass-through function allows all other network nodes to function normally while providing the proper trouble indications. high electrical noise) unshielded. the NIC reads the bus data traffic. while retaining the ability to detect ground faults. While the node without power will not participate in networking. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION although somewhat more slowly than if both channels are in operation. J-4. J-4. floating RS-485 transceiver and the other half is a non-isolated. the data is written to the NIC which sends the signals out to the bus for receipt by remote NICs.1 Central Control Module (CCM) CPU Board Network Interface Card (NIC) Network Wiring Central Control Module CPU Board When a node wishes to transmit over a network channel. J-4.2. Each node uses one (1) NIC.PEGAsys™ Refer to Table J-1 for a summary of these relationships. NIC Block Diagram (Shown with Power to NIC Lost) J-4. J-4. Data communication will be configured on the NIC’s UART as 8 bits.

J-7. If the networking upgrade is for an older system. With single-channel operation. Version 8. IC chip extraction tool. After this is accomplished. J-6 PARTS LIST The NIC Installation Kit (P/N 76-100036-500) consists of the following: D escrip tio n Network Interface Card (NIC) Snap-in Nylon Standoff. These components are not to be removed from their protective wrappings until they are to be installed in their respective equipment locations. ! CAUTION NETWORK INTERFACE CARD NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CCM CPU BOARD PEGAsys PANEL CCM CPU BOARD PEGAsys PANEL Note A: Attach the shields on the 'N' side of the network line to the grounding screw on the CCM. Ground strap (wrist strap) for ESD protection. both functional and both reporting troubles. an open circuit on any network wire will effectively break the network into two separate peer-to-peer networks.1 NIC Installation ! CAUTION Note B Channel 1 Note A B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 PEGAsys system installation applications require that when a NIC is installed. First replace the old CCM with the new CCM and then install the NIC. 8-32 Theadless Brass Standoff. and then only by personnel connected to earth ground. twisted pair cables must connect each pair of panels. a new CCM can be recognized by a singleline 20 pin header on the top edge on right side of board. No. as shown in Figure J-4. Figure J-4. Following are instructions both for replacement of complete CCM modules. Note: For proper network configuration it is necessary to use Version 7.3 The PEGAsys panel will be delivered with a separate network interface card. and for installing a NIC in an existing CCM module.X (or later) of PCS. In the event of failure. ¾-in. 6" flat-blade screwdriver.2 06-250116-030 06-235848-001 Some or all of the following tools will be required to perform removal and installation. For full Style-7 operation. the panels are wired together using twisted. The CCM module consists of both the CPU panel and its attached LCD display and keypad assembly. Small needle nose pliers. Note B: The shields on the 'I' side of the network line are to be cut short and left floating. Screw with Washer Installation Sheet P art N u mb er 74-200036-500 06-118142-001 06-118143-001 Many electronic components are subject to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). the module should be returned to the factory for repair or replacement. 76-100016-001 J-5 July 2003 . 2 cross-head screwdriver. see the PEGAsys Configuration Software user's manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). predischarge and release-state activation. two unshielded. Nickel plated 8-32 x 1¼-in. Required Tools J-7. For complete information on this aspect of installation. • • • • • • • Small flat-blade screwdriver. some existing panels can be retrofitted with a network interface card. See following instructions for NIC installation. the new CCM and Network Interface Card (NIC) will be separate. AWG-18 or heavier. Network Wiring J-5 MAINTENANCE AND/OR REPLACEMENT No maintenance is required. As of this date. Wire striper.PEGAsys™ Channel 2 J-7. Note: Determine whether you have a newer or older CCM.X (or later) of PCS is required for proper configuration. unshielded-pair cable. Central Control Module J-7 INSTALLATION The NIC is installed as a daughter board to the CCM board. as well as abort-state activation are limited to the originating fire-alarm control panel. Single-channel operation (using only one twisted pair cable between NICs) is possible and provides Style 4 operation.

Insert the three plastic standoffs that were included with the NIC into the holes shown in Figure J-5. Spacer will separate NIC and the CCM board and screw will go through to the panel. No local test functions exist. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM assembly in place. make sure that the chassis remains grounded. Ensure that all programming is saved using PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS). Remove power from panel but be sure the chassis remains grounded. 5. Attach network wiring as previously described. 9. 10. 20-PIN RECEPTACLE FOR NIC The old CCM module can be removed as a whole and replaced with a new module. 12. LONG SCREW AND SPACER THROUGH HERE INSERT PLASTIC STANDOFFS HERE DISPLAY PORT RS-485 PORT RX/TX PORT P. see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) User's Manual. 6.4 Removing and Replacing a Complete CCM Module 10. 3. Carefully plug in the membrane keypad and attach the four screws. Remove the six threaded spacers that secure the display electronics board and lift board out. Remove power from the control unit. 5. Replace the display electronics board and reattach the six threaded spacers. Ensure that the power supply EPROM is of a version compatible with PEGAsys networking. 7. Refer to Figure J-2.C. Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal. reinstall programming and configure the network using PCS. 1. Apply power. PORT RX/TX PORT RS-485 PORT PRINT PORT DISP PORT PRINT PORT PC PORT Figure J-5. 7. The following provides the procedure for removing and replacing a complete CCM module. Remove four nylon screws holding membrane keypad and remove membrane by pulling it straight out of its connector. 9. 11. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap. Remove CCM assembly from cabinet. If undamaged. Secure upper right corner of NIC with long screw and spacer. For more information on testing the NIC and the network. 4. see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). making sure that each wire and cable is properly reconnected. All networked control units must have the same version of CCM Firmware.5 Installing an NIC in an existing CCM Module 1. Disconnect cables from the RS-485 port.PEGAsys™ J-7. Data and power lines will remain connected. J-9 TESTING Testing is a function of the PEGAsys system in which the NIC is installed. Ensure that all programming is saved using PCS software. 2. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap. the RX/TX port. Carefully plug the NIC into the 20-pin receptacle and onto the plastic standoffs. J-7. 11. 4. No other power connections are required. Remove new CCM assembly from packing and inspect for physical damage. Do not disconnect board—let it hang down. 2. Refer to Figure J-2. 3. Apply power. J-8 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS The NIC is powered by the panel to which it is attached via the CCM board. Make sure pins and receptacle are properly aligned. 8. J-10 SPECIFICATIONS Input Voltage Supervisory Current Alarm Current 24 Vdc 50 mA maximum 50 mA maximum July 2003 J-6 76-100016-001 . reinstall programming and configure the network using PCS. For the proper procedure.6 Replacing Firmware Chips Refer to the instructions in the applicable PEGAsys Firmware Upgrade Kit. Remove the remaining wiring from CCM. Make note of each wire and cable connection for use during reassembly 6. CCM Board Showing NIC Attachment Points J-7. proceed to Step 10. 8. and the PC port.

As with any SmartOne loop device. Once installed and configured. the module should be replaced. and is not field serviceable. A trouble condition inhibits the status LED completely. Little or no maintenance is required.7 V RMS speakers. + AUDIO MODE P1=1&2 S1=3 ON + - + - - + UL R The output circuit is monitored by reverse polarity and will not actuate into a short. MA 01721 U. 76-100016-001 K-1 January 2002 . Internal power supply. Auxiliary power supply connections and status. and install a 4. IN TROUBLE CKT.S. Connections to loop voltage and communications.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX K ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE K-1 INTRODUCTION Addressing and registration into the PEGAsys system is described in Paragraph 2-8 (and sub-paragraphs) of this manual. install a 47K Ω resistor on the output circuit.POWER LIMITED ALL OTHERS . Set the ASM for audio mode. AUXILIARY MODE P1=2&3 S1=1&2 ON KIDDE-FENWAL. A B A B PC LINE TM AUX. short or a relay contact failure. The module provides continuous internal supervision of: • • • • • Alarm contact position. open. walk test. K-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION For installation details and complete electrical and mechanical specifications.7K Ω resistor on the trouble circuit when addressing with the handheld programmer. NO. non-silenceable (waterflow). Testing is accomplished through the testing capabilities of the PEGAsys panel. The ASM can be individually field programmed via hardware to support notification appliances and NFPA Class B. drill mode and silence. See Figure K-2 for audio/ auxiliary notification appliance switch and jumper selections. The programming process is described in PEGAsys™ Configuration Software (PCS) manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). Style Y or Class A. ASM Front Panel K-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTRATION The ASM is shipped from the factory as an assembled component. for particulars./AUDIO MODE SETTINGS ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM) AUX. Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance. For replacement. the device will transmit a specific trouble status. as described in Chapter 2 of this manual. ASHLAND. OUTPUT CKT. Registration of the module at the PEGAsys panel is mandatory to ensure proper operation. addressing is done via the Kidde hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) or the PEGAsys control panel menu/keypad. This component is a UL Listed field device. K-5 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT FM APPROVED Figure K-1. Connection is via the SmartOne compatible control panel’s power/communication line.A.POWER LIMITED DEVICE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _ The SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) provides a fully supervised remote-output circuit for connection to either 24 Vdc audible/visual notification signaling devices or 25/70. Module-programmable parameters include owner’s-location message. 70-200200-001 INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001 PC LINE TERMINALS . If the circuit has a ground fault. see the ASM Installation Data Sheet (P/N 06-235717-001). the ASM requires little or no maintenance. CAT. The module's 24 Vdc or 25/70 Vac modes can be changed from the factory defaults using switch S1 and jumper P1 (see Figure K-1). and NFPA operation Class A and Class B terminal selections. Memory status. In the event of a failure. Note: The ASM is not intended to be used as a releasing device and is not compatible with solenoids. follow the instructions in the ASM Installation data sheet. A status LED is mounted on the unit and indicates the output circuit status by a two second (active) or nine second (normal) flash interval. 4K of memory and all necessary electronics to provide standard notification or audio output. INC. Style Z operation. See Chapter 5. K-3 OPERATION The SmartOne® Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) is an intelligent field device that contains its own microprocessor.

auxiliary input circuit and the trouble circuit are non-power limited. the output circuit.0 4. #16 and #18 AWG wire (4.2 Output Circuit Characteristics The following parts are required for installation and operation.7 V RMS 20.0 V RMS Maximum Line Resistances (with 12 AWG wire) L o ad (a m p s ) 0. Power limited or non-power limited amplifier outputs are available.0 L e n g th (fe e t)* 12.0 A max.50 2. Refer to the RX/TX specifications in the chapters on Operation and Functional Description for addressable-loop wiring specifications. January 2002 K-2 76-100016-001 . #14.00 R esistan ce (o h m s ) 20.5 mm2.5k 0. ! CAUTION *Note: Consider total line lengths from module to field and return.2k Refer to Figure K-2 and to the ASM Installation Instruction Data Sheet. Size #18 AWG is the minimum requirement. 1/2 W: P/N 06-250166-596 Installation Data Sheet: P/N 06-235717-001 INSTALLATION Output Circuit Rating 2. K-7.7 K Ohms.00 1.4mm) NTS Figure K-2. ¼-Inch Strip Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper box specifications.PEGAsys™ K-6 PARTS LIST If the auxiliary notification appliance power source is not power limited.0 W @ 25.0 8.55 1.7 2.1 Installation Notes The ASM single printed circuit board is intended for indoor use and can be mounted in a North American 4-11/16" electrical box.5 mm2 and 1. Exposing more than ¼-inch of wire may cause a ground fault. Strip ¼-inch from the ends of all wires that connect to the terminal block of the module. FPLR or FPLP cable per Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). All are supplied with the ASM.0 mm2. Otherwise.0 mm2 respectively). Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equipment. • • • • • K-7 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module: P/N 70-200200-001 Front Cover Plate: P/N 06235714-001 End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor. Power/Communication (PC) line wiring is power limited and supervised.6k 1. all three circuits are power limited. K-7. Exposing less than ¼-inch of wire may result in a faulty connection. The module terminal block will accept #12. The note located on the module's product label (ALL OTHERS-POWER LIMITED) must be removed if the module is connected to a non-power limited supply source.94 cubic-inches.0k 5. The use of solid wire and an extension ring is recommended. or 4-inch square 2-1/8-inch deep box. use Type FPL. ASM volume is 8.22 0.0 W @ 70. 4. 1/4“ (6. @ 30. 47 K Ohms.0k 2. 2. For power-limited circuits.0 2. 1/2 W: P/N 06-250166-452 End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor.0 Vdc 20. 1.

. All circuits are supervised.. Figure K-3. OUTPUT CKT. Terminal connection supports wiring from #18 AWG (1. Wires determine electrical box depth.+ LISTED COMPATIBLE 24VDC OR 25/70. Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equipment.0 mm2) to #12 AWG (4. PC Line wiring is power limited and supervised. auxiliary input circuit and the trouble circuit are nonpower limited.POWER LMTD. MA 01721 U. + . 6. 5. + REGULATED SUPPLY OR 25/70. 4. Otherwise. the output circuit. ALL OTHERS . 1/2W EOL RESISTOR OUTPUT CKT.7 VAC AUDIO AMPLIFIER LISTED FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEMS LISTED 4./AUDIO MODE SETTINGS ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE AUX. 1/2W EOL RESISTOR + - TROUBLE CONTACT OPEN FOR NORMAL STATUS EXAMPLE OF STYLE Z (CLASS A) SHOWING THE ONLY ALLOWABLE EOL RESISTOR POSITION. IN + . If auxiliary power source is non-power limited.+ - TROUBLE CKT. all three circuits are power limited.+ SEE NOTE 4 + + LISTED 47K. 1/2W EOL RESISTOR EXAMPLE OF STYLE Y (CLASS B) SHOWING THE ONLY ALLOWABLE EOL RESISTOR POSITION.S. NOTES: 1. 2. INC.POWER LIMITED DEVICE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _ A B A B PC LINE AUX. 70-200200-001 INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001 PC LINE TERMINALS . NO.7VAC NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES SEE NOTE 6 SUPPLY OUT LISTED 47K. Installation Wiring Diagram 76-100016-001 K-3 January 2002 . 3.0 mm2). ASHLAND. CAT.7K. + .PEGAsys™ PC LINE IN FOR 24VDC MODE SET P1 JUMPER FROM 2-3 AND SWITCH S1 1 2 3 ON ON OFF FOR AUDIO MODE SET P1 JUMPER FROM 1-2 AND SWITCH S1 1 2 3 OFF OFF ON VERIFY SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS AND TEST PER NFPA 72 PC LINE OUT SEE NOTE 3 KIDDE-FENWAL.A. Refer to Control Panel Manual for addressable loop wiring specification.

PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. January 2002 K-4 76-100016-001 .

Operator inputs are passed to the PEGAsys for processing. RDCM Front Panel System Status Display AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE SCROLL R All operator interfaces are contained in the front panel assembly.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX L REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE L-1 INTRODUCTION L-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This manual contains the information necessary to support the PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module (RDCM) (Figure L-1). the master will be granted immediate system control. P/N 76-300000-501. if programmed. the RDCM contains system control switches and a tactile response numeric keypad. In each instance. The RDCM and RDM communicate with the PEGAsys via an RS-485 interface (one pair #18 AWG. P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015. Silence: Silence signal/audibles after Acknowledge. non-resetable power is required and can be provided by the control panel PSU or a separate UL Listed supply for fire alarm application. The RDCM is key and password secured with the password needed being the one used on the associated PEGAsys panel. provides remote access to the system and. Drill operation is available through the PEGAsys menu. remote power is supervised by the RDCM and RDM with failure displayed locally and at the control panel. 76-100016-001 L-1 July 2003 . Reset: Reset latched alarm conditions. the PEGAsys network panel(s) and menu options via this emulation of the PEGAsys front panel function and numeric keys. Additional supporting documentation is also contained in this manual and in the PEGAsys™ Configuration Software (PCS) manuals. The RDCM operator-interface function keys are: Figure L-2. attempts to input from another module will prompt a lockout display message on the module attempting the interrupt. Additionally. and Remote Display Module (RDM) (Figure L-2). These controls match the PEGAsys layout. twisted/unshielded wire) in a multi-drop configuration capable of supporting up to fifteen (15) RDCM display/control and sixteen (16) RDM display only modules. The installation can be in any combination of RDCM/RDM modules so long as the maximum quantity for each module is not exceeded. The units also contain a buzzer with sequencing that follows the buzzer contained in the control panel. Under these conditions. Both modules function as remote addressable adjuncts to the PEGAsys and mimic the main control panel’s LCD and LED front displays. L-2. in addition to emulation of the PEGAsys LEDs and LCD display. RDM Front Panel Module installers must be fully factory trained in all aspects of the PEGAsys system. This acts to prevent conflicting inputs. Under all circumstances.1 Operator Interface System Status Display AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE 1 SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET 2 3 4 SILENCE SCROLL 5 R 6 7 8 9 0 Figure L-1. Remote. • • • • Note: Acknowledge: Acknowledge alarms/troubles and silence all local buzzers. The RDCM. Either the PEGAsys control panel or one RDCM can be programmed as the master unit to control the system under alarm or fault conditions. The RDM does not permit operation of the control features (operation is “read only”). Operation of an alternate (nonmaster) unit will grant that module exclusive control over the system for 30 seconds. P/N 76-300000-502. Scroll: Review active alarms/troubles.

Power-on: Indicates the system is receiving AC power. Active Supervisory Mode and Active Trouble Mode. Supervisory: Indicates a supervisory condition.2 Interconnection The RDCM and RDM operate on a shared RS-485 bus which supports wire runs of up to 4000 ft.PEGAsys™ The RDCM operator interface needed to enter the password and access the PEGAsys menu is provided via the alphanumeric keypad: • • • Note: 0–9: Used to enter digits to access PEGAsys menus. especially the sections on Active Alarm Mode.24V TO TROUBLE CONTACTS CLOSED = NORMAL OPERATION Figure L-3. ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED. L-2. supervisory and pre-alarm. mounted on the printed circuit board. from the PEGAsys control panel. 5 6 1 2 4 TB1 PINS UP TO 31 REMOTE DEVICES POWER SUPPLY RDCM/RDM ASSEMBLY IN DCM ASSEMBLY 7 8 RDCM/RDM ASSEMBLY IN 3 AUX. 3. PEGAsys AUX. For RX/TX loop input devices: To set either latching or non-latching. RDCM(s) July 2003 L-2 76-100016-001 . Therefore. Table L-1. The primary RS-485 bus from the PEGAsys will support up to fifteen (15) RDCMs and sixteen (16) RDMs in any combination not exceeding the maximum for each module. SW1. Before proceeding with operations. 4-bit hexadecimal coded rotary switch. Address Switch Settings S w itch S ettin g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R D M/R D C M Ad d ress RDM or RDCM 01 RDM or RDCM 02 RDM or RDCM 03 RDM or RDCM 04 RDM or RDCM 05 RDM or RDCM 06 RDM or RDCM 07 RDM or RDCM 08 S w itch S ettin g 9 A B C D E F 0 R D M/R D C M Ad d ress RDM or RDCM 09 RDM or RDCM 10 RDM or RDCM 11 RDM or RDCM 12 RDM or RDCM 13 RDM or RDCM 14 RDM or RDCM 15 RDM 16 LED colors used to represent indications are: • • • Red: Alarm. Enter: Used when selecting from PEGAsys menus. but does not provide the other function keys nor an operable keypad. RDM. Operation of above keys will be hereinafter described. become totally familiar with PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System manual. Address selection is via setting of the 16-way. L-3 OPERATION The RDM functions as read only. Green: Power-on. Silence: Indicates PEGAsys signal/audibles have been silenced after Acknowledge. IF SHIELDED CABLE. Pre-alarm: Indicates a smoke or thermal detector is in pre-alarm condition. Backspace: Used to exit menu and correct entries. trouble. 2. it has a scroll key. Interconnection of PEGAsys Panel. Trouble: Indicates a trouble condition. REMOVE JUMPER W2 FROM DCM AND ALL INTERMEDIATE REMOTE DISPLAYS. SUPPLY (IF REQ'D. CPU fail: Mounted on main PCB and available to the installer only.) + . 24V TB1 PINS + 5 6 TB1 PINS 1 2 7 8 TWISTED UNSHIELDED CABLE PINS 3 & 4 ARE TIED TOGETHER WHEN USING THE PANELS POWER SUPPLY 3 OUT 4 6 5 TB1 PINS PIN 1 OF TB1 IS AT TOP OF CONNECTOR NOTES: 1. refer to the PCS Operations chapter in the PEGAsys Configuration Software manual. INSTALL W2 ON LAST REMOTE DISPLAY ONLY. Be sure to note differences between latching and non-latching Active Alarm Modes. CONNECT SHIELD TO CHASSIS/EARTH GROUND. Yellow: CPU failure. See Figure L-4. silence. Indicates RDCM/RDM processor has failed to initialize.3 Addressing The RDCM and RDM operator interface status LEDs for monitoring the PEGAsys and remote modules are: • • • • • • • Alarm: Indicates an alarm condition. L-2.

1. the local buzzer will sound and the trouble LED will light. in the case of multiple alarms (either On or Off).2) on the module attempting the interrupt to prevent conflicting inputs. assume RDCM address 02. • After the 30 second control period. and subsequently display how many active supervisory or trouble conditions are still present in the system (if any). L-3. assume the device to be manual release. When a RX/TX loop device goes into active alarm. address 1004). causing all conditions programmed to cancel on reset to de-energize. The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other RDCM(s). actuation of the acknowledge input may be separate or programmed to global acknowledge. For example: 001 ACTIVE ALARMS REMAINING When all alarm and trouble conditions have been acknowledged. The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other RDCMs. the display will show: 1004 ALARM ON .MANUAL RELEASE Default or user text (The default or user text is that which is entered at the associated PEGAsys panel. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the system for 30 seconds. input devices programmed to the latching sequence will show: XXX ALARMS ACTIVE Input devices programmed to the non-latching sequence will show: NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS Operation of the “reset” switch will have the following results: • The RDCM will pass the reset input to the PEGAsys.3 RESET After all active alarms and troubles have been cleared. 76-100016-001 L-3 July 2003 .1 ACKNOWLEDGE All ALARM ON. The RDCM will pass the acknowledge input to the PEGAsys causing its LED to go from a pulsing to a steady mode. each ALARM OFF will display and must be acknowledged. each event must be acknowledged separately.) The display will then show how many active alarms are still present in the system (if any). all other multiple inputs will default to individual acknowledge. the display will show: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 06-08-99 PEGASYS In practice. A maximum of thirty (30) trouble messages can be acknowledged at any one time. and the buzzer to silence. TROUBLE ON/OFF or SUPERVISORY ON/OFF messages must be acknowledged by operation of this switch.1. For non-latching sequence. For these examples. If another (non-master) module attempts an interrupt.1 Switch Functions Again.2 SILENCE The switch functions are listed in sequence of use: L-3. the module (or control panel) programmed as the system master will be granted immediate system control. the actual local time and date will be shown. 1004 ALARM OFF .1.1. This message cannot be changed from the RDCM. The PEGAsys sends a global command to silence all remote RDCM/RDM buzzers. but may be programmed to global acknowledge by accessing the “SET" menu from the PEGAsys or any RDCM. Under all circumstances. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software manual. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the system for 30 seconds. L-3. In Normal Standby Mode. attempts to input from another module will prompt a lockout display message (see Paragraph L-3. ALARM OFF. Under these conditions. This message can be customized in PCS. In the case of multiple troubles. The display at the calling device will then show: 1004 ALARM ON ACK .PEGAsys™ The following example is for latching alarm mode (for these examples. any other module can provide system inputs (unless a module programmed as system master assumes control). operation of the “silence” switch will have the following results: • The RDCM will pass the silence input to the PEGAsys causing all outputs programmed for silence to de-energize.MANUAL RELEASE Default or user text In the event of loss of communications between the RDCM and the PEGAsys on the RS-485 bus. Multiple alarms must be individually acknowledged.MANUAL RELEASE Default or user text L-3. the following lockout message will display for 5 seconds: RDCM 02 IN CONTROL Note: RDCM 02 is the default.

press the “0” key. The power failure display is: July 2003 L-4 76-100016-001 . Each PEGAsys is shipped from the factory with default passwords for Level 1 of 987 and Level 2 of 1865. supervisory or trouble. Backspace: Exit system menu or correct wrong entries. The calling device (address 02) will then have access to the PEGAsys menu. With no active events in the system. the PEGAsys will send the 30 second global lockout command to all other RDCMs. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software manual.4 Password Data Structure The PEGAsys. All LEDs will light for 5 seconds. Enter: Enter information into the system menu. if correct.4 SCROLL • L-3. These are: Level 1 (User Level) and Level 2 (Installer Level). all RDCM/RDMs will display the default message: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00am 03-08-99 PEGASYS “PEGASYS” is the default message. LCD Display When the “Scroll” key is pressed during any active system event. • LED Test Feature: With no active inputs. the relevant keys are: • • • Numeric 0-9: Enters password and system function information. the PEGAsys will update the RDCM with the default display. Default passwords can be customized in the Level 2 “Set Menu Function”. press and hold the “scroll” key for 2 seconds. • Two system levels are available from the RDCM. L-3.3 If the password entry is incorrect. active alarm.2 LED Status Display The front panel display LEDs will operate in three modes: • • Off: No system activity.1. Calling device (address 02) will then have exclusive control over the system as described in “reset” above. the display will become: PASSWORD ENTRY FAILED The RDCM will request another password entry request. Changing passwords for the system can be accomplished from any RDCM or directly from the PEGAsys. In the event of an RDCM's microprocessor going into fault condition. If during the password entry sequence any key other than the numeric key (except “Backspace”) is pressed before the “Enter” key. This can be customized by PCS. 1 second off.5 RDCM/RDM Local Trouble Conditions To enter the password. When a “Scroll” key is actuated at any RDCM. Note: The RDM scroll key does not provide the global lockout command. L-3.PEGAsys™ • The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the system for 30 seconds and displays the following message: SYSTEM RESET If there are no further key entries at the calling device (address 02). actuation of hardware switch S3 located behind the display membrane will cause a hardware reset of the microprocessor. all modules and the PEGAsys will display the system default message: SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 03-08-99 PEGASYS In practice. Pulsing: 1 second on. Refer to the “Menu Function” and “Menu Structure” sections of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System manual for descriptions of the capabilities available through these levels. The RDCM opens the password entry menu and displays: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD Each key entry will then display the “#” character: PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD #### The RDCM/RDM is supervised for failure of the power supply and failure to communicate with the PEGAsys during the polling routine. the following will result: The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other RDCM(s). L-3. RDM or the PEGAsys. supervisory or trouble. and no further system events are detected. RDCMs and RDMs will then be updated by the next event in the buffer. On Continuously: Acknowledged alarm. the resulting scroll display is sent globally to the system. System Information Entry Keys: To enter passwords and gain access the PEGAsys menu functions. and. the actual local time and date will be shown. Please refer to this manual for menu operating instructions. L-3.

not exceedi ng maxi mum for each module NFPA Style 4. 13 oz E N V IR ON ME N TAL Op eratin g temp eratu re Op eratin g h u mid ity 32oF (0oC)–120oF (49oC) 85% non-condensi ng Maximu m R D C M/R D Ms Wirin g style L-5 INSTALLATION See Figure L-4. 76-100016-001 L-5 July 2003 . from PEGAsys control panel usi ng #18 AWG twi sted/unshelded wi re 15 RDCMs/16 RDMs i n any combi nati on. a local trouble message will be displayed on the RDCM/RDM.156" H 4 lbs. NO COMMUNICATION WITH MAIN PANEL L-4 SPECIFICATIONS Table L-1.05" W X 7. Class "B" ME C H AN IC AL D imen sio n s Weig h t 12. RDCM/RDM Specifications E L E C T R IC AL In p u t vo ltag e S u p erviso ry cu rren t Alarm cu rren t R S -485 n etw o rk 24 Vdc nomi nal 64 mA nomi nal 85 mA nomi nal Up to 4000 ft.PEGAsys™ REMOTE PSU FAULT “ON” RDCM XX If no communication is detected with the PEGAsys during the polling routine and the PSU is active.

875 9. NO .409 MOUNTING FOR #10 (.250 W1 LED BACKLIGHT ENABLE VR1 LED BACKLIGHT ADJUST VR2 LCD CONTRAST ADJUST PO WE R SU P Y PL IS TW TE D SH IEL D ED CA BL O ET A CH SS IS H RT /EA GR OU ND . DS1 SW3 HARDWARE FOR GND.) SCREWS 12. CONNECTION CONNECTOR UL R FM VED O PR AP INSTRUCTION LABEL SE R.500 SW1 ADDRESS 1 TO 16 (F) 1/2" & 3/4" COMBINATION KNOCKOUTS (2) LOCATED ON TOP SURFACE (1) LOCATED ON EACH SIDE.PEGAsys™ . 1. Figure L-4.000 5.190 DIA. Installation of RDM or RDCM July 2003 L-6 76-100016-001 .

the control panel acts as a central display and control interface. All of the prealarm. Up to 255 AAM modules can be connected to a single RX/TX module. Operation and Maintenance Manual. A change in temperature produces a change in resistance between the loops within the sensor cable (as the temperature increases. please refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation. Addressable AlarmLine™ Module Front Panel M-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTERING M-5 PARTS LIST Refer to Chapter 9 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation. alarm and trouble conditions to be transmitted to the control panel via the RX/TX (Receive/Transmit) loop. M-4 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT TM The AAM is shipped from the factory as an assembled component and is not field serviceable. The AAM monitors the resistance of the sensor cable and generates a prealarm (if enabled). M-6 INSTALLATION Each AAM is shipped from the factory with the default address of ‘000’. The appropriate configuration setting for a given set point is established by the use of a nomogram incorporating two known factors: • • Maximum ambient temperature of the alarm zone Length of the sensor cable The integrating (averaging) effect of the sensor cable allows it to detect localized hot spot or a low level temperature increase over the entire length. Operation and Maintenance Manual for further information on maintenance and testing of field devices connected to the PEGAsys panel RX/TX loop. The temperature at which the system will alarm is determined by selecting one of 16 configuration settings using the control panel’s configuration software or CCM menu options. alarm or overheat output (if enabled) when the resistance drops below the programmed threshold. This change is continuously monitored by the AAM. Operation and Maintenance Manual.04). If a hand-held programmer is not available. The use of multiple AAMs allows for flexibility in zoning larger installations for location of alarm and zone output control. This interface will allow for pre-alarm. Operation and Maintenance Manual. This permits connection to the Power Communication (PC) line without interfering with devices already on the loop. which generates an alarm or pre-alarm signal at a predetermined level corresponding to the temperature set point. resistance decreases exponentially). the address can be changed directly at the CCM using the procedure outlined in Chapter 2 of this manual. Only one device with this default address should be connected to the PC line at a time. Operation and Maintenance Manual (P/N 73. the AAM address can be preset with a hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) after which the module can be connected to the PC line.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX M ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE™ MODULE M-1 INTRODUCTION M-3 OPERATION The Addressable AlarmLineTM Module (AAM) permits an AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys control panel. For complete information. which will generate a fault condition. Alternately. July 2003 . Little or no maintenance is required. please refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation. 76-100016-001 M-1 Refer to Paragraph 3-2 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation. Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual and to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation. alarm. overheat and trouble conditions will be displayed on the Central Control Module (CCM) of the PEGAsys panel. The module also supervises the AlarmLine cable for opens and shorts. For more detailed information. Figure M-1.

PEGAsys™
M-7 TESTING

Refer to Chapter 7 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.

July 2003

M-2

76-100016-001

PEGAsys™

APPENDIX N NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM)
N-1 INTRODUCTION Configuration Software (PCS) is used to program the system. A multi-level password scheme protects the system from unauthorized access. The real-time clock provides the NCCM with the ability to display the current time and date on the system LCD and provides basic information for real-time operations. Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the system. Examples include: microprocessor failure, memory failure, RS-232 port troubles, etc. Network diagnostics are controlled separately and report to appropriate panels. The two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 and MP2) provided are used primarily for signaling devices (horns, bells, strobes) and deliver up to 2.0 Amps of 24 Vdc power. Optionally, the MP1 output can be programmed for releasing applications using solenoid-actuated suppression equipment (agent and sprinkler). Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 and MP4) are provided on the NCCM for controlling building functions during alarm occurrences. Relays are Form C, 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc rated. All four NCCM outputs can be programmed via EOC to activate from either panel or, if provided, network inputs. One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied which is normally powered (24 Vdc) and will transfer on any system (or, if provided, network) trouble, supervisory, pre-alarm and complete power-off condition. Relay is Form C, rated 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc. Refer to Appendix I for mechanical installation details. An event history buffer is provided on the NCCM which will store 1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multiloop system events information. Network option does not alter event limits, however, network events are recorded. The system menu permits operator retrieval of recorded events. The PCS program provides the ability to download, store and print all or a portion of the event history buffer. The NCCM common display module assembly (which is physically and electronically attached to the main processor module) provides the system with the operator interface and, if provided, network interface for control switches, system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80 character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security password and navigating through the user menus. The system buzzer provides two distinct signaling patterns for audible warning of system alarms and troubles.

The Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM), shown in Figure N-1, is the heart of the PEGAsys system and is composed of two printed circuit board assemblies: the display control module (DCM) and the CCM printed circuit board. The NCCM is available in two versions: P/N 76100008-501/-701 for single-loop systems and P/N 76100008-600/-800 for multi-loop systems.

System Status Display

AC POWER ALARM PRE-ALARM

SYSTEM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY SILENCE 1

SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE SYSTEM RESET 2 3 4

SILENCE

SCROLL

5

R

6

7

8

9

0

Figure N-1. Networkable Central Control Module Front Panel The NCCM is essentially identical to the CCM described earlier in this manual, with the same capabilities. However, the CCM printed circuit board has been designed to receive the optional Network Interface Card (see the physical description and menu options in Appendix J of this manual), enabling networked operation. Additionally, the display control module adjunct to the main processor module provides connection to the Remote Display Control Module (RDCM) and Remote Display Module (RDM) described in Appendix L of this manual. N-2 CONFIGURATION/FUNCTION

The CCM PCB controls the operation and supervision of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX module, and system data from the optional NIC and/or RDCM. It processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output commands to the output modules, optional NIC and/or RDCM or RDM modules, loop output devices, and the adjunct display control module. The CCM PCB contains the system CPU, real-time clock, watchdog timer and two serial RS-232 ports: a programming input/output (PC) port and a printer output port. These ports accept 6-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. PEGAsys

76-100016-001

N-1

July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003

N-2

76-100016-001

7k 10 11 12 Zone 4 Trouble Zone 3 Alarm 18 17 16 15 14 13 Figure O-1. See the Model 5104 installation manual for information regarding connection of the DACT to the telephone line for alarm and trouble transmission(s). A Silent Knight DACT—Model 5104—must be wired to the PEGAsys control panel. Wiring for DACT 76-100016-001 O-1 July 2003 . the PEGAsys control panel must be configured for central station use through PCS menu (Network Settings). Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 PCB NO NC C Volt Free Relay 2 NO NC C Fault Relay PegaSYS CCM PCB 4.7k 8 9 4. as shown in Figure O-1.PEGAsys™ APPENDIX O CENTRAL STATION OPERATION O-1 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION For central station operation.

PEGAsys™ THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. July 2003 O-2 76-100016-001 .

Ashland. TABLE NO. Received b. SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT 6. Comments 220423 . RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO PUBLICATION PAGE NO. Priority d. Fold on dotted line. MA 01721. ORIGINATOR 11. KIDDE-FENWAL USE ONLY a. CHANGE NO. PROBLEM EXCELLENT QUESTION GOOD FAIR POOR COMMENT: (check one) COMPLETE INCOMPLETE SUGGESTION 9. RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON (Use Blank Continuation Sheets as Required) 10. USER EVALUATION MANUAL IS: 8. PART NUMBER 2. Documentation Manager or FAX to 508-881-8920) DATE: 1. OR REV.TECHNICAL MANUAL USER FEEDBACK FORM (Use this report to indicate deficiencies. 3. Inc. TITLE (NOMENCLATURE) 4.. COMPANY NAME 12. user remarks and recommendations relating to the publication. 400 Main Street. Action Necessity c. ADDRESS 13. PRIORITY OF COMMENT 7. NO. Attn. NO. DATE 5. tape and mail to KIDDE-FENWAL. VOLUME NO. PARAGRAPH LINE FIGURE NO.

400 Main Street Ashland.FOLD Place Stamp Here KIDDE-FENWAL. Documentation Manager FOLD 220423 . MA 01721 Attn. Inc.

.

EXCLUDES warranties of MERCHANTABILITY and FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE and liability for CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. which. Inc. Kidde. nor do they provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation. Please contact Kidde-Fenwal directly for a return material authorization (RMA) number before returning material to the factory at Ashland. please read the entire LIMITED WARRANTY on the Kidde-Fenwal Quotation. Ashland. shipment prepaid. the matter should be referred to KIDDE-FENWAL INC. All specifications subject to change without notice. and it will repair or replace any product or part thereof which proves to be defective in workmanship or material for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of purchase but not to exceed eighteen (18) months after shipment by Kidde-Fenwal Inc. Inc.. Kidde-Fenwal will repair or replace and ship prepaid. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes. For a full description of Kidde-Fenwal’s LIMITED WARRANTY. These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipment described. Printed in USA . AlarmLine.LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT Kidde-Fenwal. BD © 2003 Kidde-Fenwal. Acceptance of Order and/or Original Invoice which will become part of your sales agreement. operation and maintenance. Masssachusetts 76-100016-001 Rev. Massachusetts. PEGAsys and ORION are trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal. among other things. HSSD and SmartOne are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal. represents that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship. Inc. Inc. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.